- Manuals
- Brands
- Mitsubishi Electric
- Module
- MRMT2010
- Instruction Manual
Mitsubishi Electric MRMT2010, MRMT2100, MRMT2200, MRMT2300 Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Mitsubishi Electric MRMT2010, MRMT2100, MRMT2200, MRMT2300 Manual PDF
SH(NA)030251ENG-B(1702)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications are subject to change without notice. This Instruction Manual uses recycled paper.
MODEL
MODEL CODE
General-Purpose AC Servo
M R
-M T
2000 S E
R IE
S IN
S T
R U
C T
IO N
M A
N U
A L
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100-8310
MODEL
MR-MT2010 MR-MT2100 MR-MT2200 MR-MT2300 MR-MT2400 INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Sensing module
B
B
A - 1
Safety Instructions Please read the instructions carefully before using the equipment.
To use the equipment correctly, do not attempt to install, operate, maintain, or inspect the equipment until you have read through this Instruction Manual, Installation guide, and appended documents carefully. Do not use the equipment until you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and instructions.
In this Instruction Manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.
CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury to personnel or may cause physical damage.
Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence depending on conditions.
Please follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personnel safety.
What must not be done and what must be done are indicated by the following diagrammatic symbols.
Indicates what must not be done. For example, "No Fire" is indicated by .
Indicates what must be done. For example, grounding is indicated by .
In this Instruction Manual, instructions at a lower level than the above, instructions for other functions, and so on are classified into "POINT". After reading this Instruction Manual, keep it accessible to the operator.
A - 2
1. To prevent electric shock, note the following
WARNING Ground the sensing module securely.
Any person who is involved in wiring and inspection should be fully competent to do the work.
Do not attempt to wire the sensing module until it has been installed. Otherwise, it may cause an electric shock.
Do not operate switches with wet hands. Otherwise, it may cause an electric shock.
The cables should not be damaged, stressed, loaded, or pinched. Otherwise, it may cause an electric shock.
To avoid an electric shock, insulate the connections of the power supply terminals.
2. To prevent fire, note the following
CAUTION Install the sensing module on incombustible material. Installing them directly or close to combustibles will
lead to smoke or a fire.
Always connect a circuit protector between the power supply and the power supply (24 V(+)) of the sensing module, in order to configure a circuit that shuts down the power supply on the side of the
sensing module power supply. If a circuit protector is not connected, a continuous flow of a large current may cause smoke or a fire when the sensing module malfunctions.
Provide an adequate protection to prevent screws and other conductive matter, oil and other combustible
matter from entering the sensing module.
3. To prevent injury, note the following
CAUTION Only the voltage specified in the Instruction Manual should be applied to each terminal. Otherwise, a burst, damage, etc. may occur.
Connect cables to the correct terminals. Otherwise, a burst, damage, etc. may occur.
Ensure that polarity (+/-) is correct. Otherwise, a burst, damage, etc. may occur.
4. Additional instructions The following instructions should also be fully noted. Incorrect handling may cause a malfunction, injury, electric shock, fire, etc.
(1) Transportation and installation
CAUTION Transport the products correctly according to their mass.
Stacking in excess of the specified number of product packages is not allowed.
Install the sensing module in a load-bearing place in accordance with the Instruction Manual.
Do not get on or put heavy load on the equipment.
The equipment must be installed in the specified direction.
A - 3
CAUTION Leave specified clearances between the sensing module and cabinet walls or other equipment.
Do not install or operate the sensing module which has been damaged or has any parts missing.
Do not block intake and exhaust areas of the sensing module. Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction.
Do not drop or strike the sensing module. Isolate it from all impact loads.
When you keep or use the equipment, please fulfill the following environment.
Item Environment
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 C to 60 C (non-freezing)
Storage -20 C to 65 C (non-freezing)
Ambient humidity
Operation 5 %RH to 90 %RH (non-condensing)
Storage
Ambience Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist or dust
Altitude
2000 m or less above sea level (When using the MR-MT2000 series at an altitude exceeding 1000 m and up to 2000 m above sea
level, the ambient temperature must be 0 C to 55 C.)
Vibration resistance 5.9 m/s2, at 10 Hz to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y and Z axes)
When the product has been stored for an extended period of time, contact your local sales office.
When handling the sensing module, be careful with the sharp edges of the sensing module.
The sensing module must be installed in a metal cabinet.
When fumigants that contain halogen materials, such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine, are used
for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects, they cause malfunction when entering our products. Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter our products, or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation, such as heat treatment.
Additionally, disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing the products.
(2) Wiring
CAUTION Wire the sensing module correctly and securely. Otherwise, the equipment may operate unexpectedly.
The connection diagrams in this Instruction Manual are shown for sink interfaces, unless stated otherwise.
The surge absorbing diode installed to the DC relay for control output signals of the sensing module
should be fitted in the specified direction. Otherwise, the emergency stop and other protective circuits may not operate.
DOCOM
Control output signal
24 V DC Sensing module
RA
For sink output interface
DOCOM
Control output signal
24 V DC Sensing module
RA
For source output interface
A - 4
(3) Test run and adjustment
CAUTION Before operation, check and adjust the parameter settings. Improper settings may cause some machines
to operate unexpectedly.
(4) Usage
CAUTION Immediately turn off the power if smoke, unusual noise, or strange odor is emitted from the sensing module.
Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the equipment.
Burning or breaking a sensing module may cause a toxic gas. Do not burn or break it.
Connect the sensing module to the specified controller.
(5) Corrective actions
CAUTION Ensure safety by confirming the power off, etc. before performing corrective actions. Otherwise, it may cause an accident.
When an alarm occurs, eliminate its cause, ensure safety, and deactivate the alarm to restart operation.
Provide an adequate protection to prevent unexpected restart after an instantaneous power failure.
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
CAUTION Do not touch the connector contacts.
It is recommended that the sensing module be replaced every 10 years when it is used in general environment.
When using the sensing module that has not been energized for an extended period of time, contact your local sales office.
(7) General instruction To illustrate details, the equipment in the diagrams of this Instruction Manual may have been drawn
without covers and safety guards. When the equipment is operated, the covers and safety guards must be installed as specified. Operation must be performed in accordance with this Instruction Manual.
A - 5
DISPOSAL OF WASTE Please dispose a sensing module and other options according to your local laws and regulations.
EEP-ROM life
The number of write times to the EEP-ROM, which stores parameter settings, etc., is limited to 100,000. If
the total number of the following operations exceeds 100,000, the sensing module may malfunction when the EEP-ROM reaches the end of its useful life.
Write to the EEP-ROM due to parameter setting changes
Compliance with global standards
Refer to app. 1 for the compliance with global standards.
About the manual
You must have this Instruction Manual and the following manual to use this sensing module. Ensure to prepare them to use the sensing module safely.
Relevant manuals
Manual name Manual No.
MELSEC iQ-R Motion Controller Programming Manual (Common) IB-0300237
Cables used for wiring
Wires mentioned in this Instruction Manual are selected based on an ambient temperature of 40 C.
U.S. customary units
U.S. customary units are not shown in this manual. Convert the values if necessary according to the following table.
Quantity SI (metric) unit U.S. customary unit
Mass 1 [kg] 2.2046 [lb]
Length 1 [mm] 0.03937 [inch]
Torque 1 [Nm] 141.6 [ozinch]
Moment of inertia 1 [( 10-4 kgm2)] 5.4675 [ozinch2]
Load (thrust load/axial load) 1 [N] 0.2248 [lbf]
Temperature N [C] 9/5 + 32 N [F]
A - 6
MEMO
1
CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION 1- 1 to 1- 4
1.1 Summary ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 1 1.2 Model designation ............................................................................................................................. 1- 2 1.3 Common specifications ..................................................................................................................... 1- 2 1.4 Configuration example including peripheral equipment ................................................................... 1- 3
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2- 1 to 2- 6
2.1 System configuration ........................................................................................................................ 2- 1 2.2 Station mode/axis mode ................................................................................................................... 2- 2 2.3 Extension module connectable to the head module ......................................................................... 2- 2 2.4 Maximum number of connections on a network ............................................................................... 2- 3
2.4.1 Station mode .............................................................................................................................. 2- 3 2.4.2 Axis mode (settable only when MR-MT2200 is connected) ...................................................... 2- 5
2.5 Compatible servo system controller ................................................................................................. 2- 6 2.6 Engineering software ........................................................................................................................ 2- 6
3. INSTALLATION 3- 1 to 3- 14
3.1 Connection and removal of modules ................................................................................................ 3- 1 3.2 How to mount a module .................................................................................................................... 3- 4
3.2.1 Mounting a module on a DIN rail ............................................................................................... 3- 4 3.2.2 Mounting a module with screws ................................................................................................. 3- 6
3.3 Installation direction and clearances ................................................................................................ 3- 7 3.4 SSCNET III cable connection ........................................................................................................... 3- 8 3.5 How to wire connectors ................................................................................................................... 3-10 3.6 Noise reduction techniques ............................................................................................................. 3-12
4. MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H HEAD MODULE 4- 1 to 4-10
4.1 Summary ........................................................................................................................................... 4- 1 4.2 Standard specifications ..................................................................................................................... 4- 1 4.3 Function list ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 1 4.4 Parts identification ............................................................................................................................. 4- 2 4.5 Station number selection rotary switch ............................................................................................. 4- 3 4.6 Status display LEDs .......................................................................................................................... 4- 4 4.7 Signals and wiring ............................................................................................................................. 4- 5
4.7.1 Pin assignment ........................................................................................................................... 4- 5 4.7.2 Signal (device) explanations ...................................................................................................... 4- 6 4.7.3 Connections of the power circuit ................................................................................................ 4- 7 4.7.4 Detailed explanation of interfaces .............................................................................................. 4- 8
5. MR-MT2100 I/O MODULE 5- 1 to 5- 8
5.1 Summary ........................................................................................................................................... 5- 1 5.2 Specification list ................................................................................................................................ 5- 1 5.3 Function list ....................................................................................................................................... 5- 2 5.4 Parts identification ............................................................................................................................. 5- 2
2
5.5 Status display LEDs .......................................................................................................................... 5- 3 5.6 Signals and wiring ............................................................................................................................. 5- 3
5.6.1 Pin assignment ........................................................................................................................... 5- 3 5.6.2 Signal (device) explanations ...................................................................................................... 5- 4 5.6.3 Connecting the interface power supply for output signal ........................................................... 5- 5 5.6.4 Detailed explanation of interfaces .............................................................................................. 5- 6
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE 6- 1 to 6-22
6.1 Summary ........................................................................................................................................... 6- 1 6.2 Standard specifications ..................................................................................................................... 6- 1 6.3 Function list ....................................................................................................................................... 6- 2 6.4 Parts identification ............................................................................................................................. 6- 2 6.5 Switching the mode between the station mode and axis mode ....................................................... 6- 3
6.5.1 Mode select switch (SW1).......................................................................................................... 6- 3 6.5.2 Settings in the station mode ....................................................................................................... 6- 4
6.6 Status display LEDs .......................................................................................................................... 6- 5 6.7 Signals and wiring ............................................................................................................................. 6- 6
6.7.1 Pin assignment ........................................................................................................................... 6- 6 6.7.2 Signal (device) explanations ...................................................................................................... 6- 8 6.7.3 Detailed explanation of interfaces ............................................................................................. 6-12 6.7.4 Command pulse output form ..................................................................................................... 6-21 6.7.5 Input pulse form ........................................................................................................................ 6-22
7. MR-MT2300 ANALOG I/O MODULE 7- 1 to 7- 8
7.1 Summary ........................................................................................................................................... 7- 1 7.2 Standard specifications ..................................................................................................................... 7- 1 7.3 Function list ....................................................................................................................................... 7- 1 7.4 Parts identification ............................................................................................................................. 7- 2 7.5 Status display LEDs .......................................................................................................................... 7- 3 7.6 Signals and wiring ............................................................................................................................. 7- 4
7.6.1 Pin assignment ........................................................................................................................... 7- 4 7.6.2 Signal (device) explanations ...................................................................................................... 7- 5 7.6.3 Description of interfaces ............................................................................................................. 7- 6
8. MR-MT2400 ENCODER I/F MODULE 8- 1 to 8- 4
8.1 Summary ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 1 8.2 Standard specifications ..................................................................................................................... 8- 1 8.3 Function list ....................................................................................................................................... 8- 1 8.4 Parts identification ............................................................................................................................. 8- 2 8.5 Status display LEDs .......................................................................................................................... 8- 2 8.6 Signals and wiring ............................................................................................................................. 8- 3
8.6.1 Pin assignment ........................................................................................................................... 8- 3 8.6.2 Connecting SSI-compatible encoders ........................................................................................ 8- 4
9. PARAMETERS 9- 1 to 9-106
9.1 Station mode ..................................................................................................................................... 9- 1 9.1.1 Parameter list ............................................................................................................................. 9- 1
3
9.1.2 Detailed list of parameters ........................................................................................................ 9-19 9.2 Axis mode ........................................................................................................................................ 9-91
9.2.1 Parameter list ............................................................................................................................ 9-91 9.2.2 Detailed list of parameters ........................................................................................................ 9-96
10. TROUBLESHOOTING 10- 1 to 10-32
10.1 Explanations of the lists ................................................................................................................ 10- 1 10.2 Alarm list ....................................................................................................................................... 10- 2 10.3 Warning list ................................................................................................................................... 10- 5 10.4 Remedies for alarms ..................................................................................................................... 10- 6 10.5 Remedies for warnings ................................................................................................................ 10-28 10.6 Trouble which does not trigger an alarm/warning ....................................................................... 10-29
10.6.1 MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H head module ............................................................................. 10-29 10.6.2 MR-MT2100 I/O module........................................................................................................ 10-29 10.6.3 MR-MT2200 pulse I/O module .............................................................................................. 10-30 10.6.4 MR-MT2300 analog I/O module ............................................................................................ 10-30 10.6.5 MR-MT2400 encoder I/F module .......................................................................................... 10-31
11. DIMENSIONS 11- 1 to 11- 4
APPENDIX App. - 1 to App. - 12
App. 1 Compliance with global standards ....................................................................................... App. - 1
4
MEMO
1. INTRODUCTION
1 - 1
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Summary
The sensing module MR-MT2000 series have four types of extension modules, the I/O module, pulse I/O module, analog I/O module, and encoder I/F module. Up to four extension modules can be connected to one SSCNET III/H head module. These modules are used to receive and output signals synchronized with SSCNET III/H communications. These modules realize a high-accuracy, wire-saving system with their distributed installations.
MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H head module
MR-MT2100 I/O module
MR-MT2200 pulse I/O module
MR-MT2300 analog I/O module
MR-MT2400 encoder I/F module
Model Name Description
MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H head module The SSCNET III/H head module is used for SSCNET III/H communications. This module is necessary to use a sensing module. Connect extension modules to this module. This module can be used alone because it has digital I/Os.
MR-MT2100 I/O module Digital signals are inputted to and outputted from the I/O module. This module processes I/O signals synchronized with SSCNET III/H communications. MR-MT2010 is necessary to use this module.
MR-MT2200 Pulse I/O module General-purpose pulse trains are inputted to and outputted from the pulse I/O module. This module outputs position commands in pulses through SSCNET III/H communications and performs position control by using general-purpose pulse train drivers and servo amplifiers. In addition, feedback pulses can also be inputted. This module processes general-purpose pulse train signals synchronized with SSCNET III/H communications. MR-MT2010 is necessary to use this module.
MR-MT2300 Analog I/O module Analog signals are inputted to and outputted from the analog I/O module. This module processes I/O signals synchronized with SSCNET III/H communications. MR-MT2010 is necessary to use this module.
MR-MT2400 Encoder I/F module The encoder I/F module supports open-standard encoder interfaces. This module processes signals synchronized with SSCNET III/H communications. MR-MT2010 is necessary to use this module.
1. INTRODUCTION
1 - 2
1.2 Model designation
(1) Rating plate The following shows an example of the rating plate for explanation of each item.
Serial number Model IP rating, Manual number
Applicable power supply Rated output power Standard number Ambient temperature KC certification number The year and month of manufacture Country of origin
MR-MT2010 IP20 MAN.: IB(NA)0300331
DATE: 2016-07
TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN MADE IN JAPAN
AC SERVO SER. A67001001
INPUT : 1.0A DC24V OUTPUT : 0.8A DC24V STD.: IEC/EN 61800-5-1 Max. Surrounding Air Temp.: 60C MSIP-REI-MEK-TC301A160G51
(2) Model The following describes what each block of a model name indicates.
Series
Symbol Module name
2010 SSCNET III/H head module
2100 I/O module
2200 Pulse I/O module
2300 Analog I/O module
2400 Encoder I/F module
Module name
M R - M T 2 0 1 0
1.3 Common specifications
The following table lists the common specifications of the MR-MT2000 series.
Item Specification
Compliance to global standards
CE marking EMC:EN 61800-3
UL standard UL 508C
Structure (IP rating) Natural cooling, open (IP20)
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 C to 60 C (non-freezing) (Note)
Storage -20 C to 65 C (non-freezing)
Environment
Ambient humidity
Operation 5 %RH to 90 %RH (non-condensing)
Storage
Ambience Indoors (no direct sunlight),
free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust, and dirt
Altitude 2000 m or less above sea level (Note)
Vibration resistance 5.9 m/s2, at 10 Hz to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y and Z axes) Note. When using the MR-MT2000 series at an altitude exceeding 1000 m and up to 2000 m above sea level, the ambient temperature
must be 0 C to 55 C.
1. INTRODUCTION
1 - 3
1.4 Configuration example including peripheral equipment
POINT
This section describes a combination example of extension modules. Combinations other than the example are also available. For details, refer to chapter 2.
Devices other than the sensing module are optional or recommended products.
The following figure shows a configuration including peripheral equipment as an example of when each MR- MT2010, MR-MT2100, MR-MT2200, MR-MT2300, and MR-MT2400 is used.
24 V(+)
24G
FG
Personal computerEngineering
software
Circuit protector
Digital I/O
Head module CN1A, servo amplifier CN1A, or cap
Servo system controller, head module CN1B, or servo amplifier CN1B
MR- MT2010
MR- MT2100
MR- MT2200
MR- MT2300
MR- MT2400
General-purpose pulse train signal
Analog I/O Open-standard encoder
Interface input
CN1A
CN1B
-+
24 V DC power supply
24 V(+)
24G
FG
-+
24 V DC power supply
Servo amplifier
Switch
Servo amplifier
Controller
SSCNET III/H
1. INTRODUCTION
1 - 4
MEMO
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2 - 1
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1 System configuration
POINT
Attach a connector cover, which is supplied with a head module, to the rightmost extension module. Attach a connector cover to a head module when the head module is used alone.
For the module configuration of the sensing module, the head module must be connected at the leftmost side, and up to four extension modules can be connected at the right side of the head module. The head module can be used alone.
MR-MT2010 MR-MT2100 MR-MT2200 MR-MT2300 MR-MT2400
Head module Extension modules Connector cover (Supplied with
a head module)
A module group consisting of one head module and extension modules connected at the right side of the head module is called one block. The following figure shows examples of blocks.
Servo system controller
1 block 1 block
Servo system controller
1 block
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2 - 2
2.2 Station mode/axis mode
POINT
Only when the MR-MT2200 pulse I/O module is connected to the head module, the station mode or axis mode can be selected. All other modules operate in the station mode, and the axis mode cannot be set.
When the MR-MT2200 series is used, two modes are available.
Mode Description
Station mode Select this mode to use the pulse I/O function for a purpose other than for driving motors. Servo amplifier axes are not occupied.
Axis mode
Select this mode to drive motors. Use this mode for driving stepping motors through general-purpose pulse train drivers just like servo amplifier axes by outputting position commands in general-purpose pulse train signals from a servo system controller. Axes are occupied by the number of motor axes connected to MR-MT2200. Axes are occupied in the same way as when MR-J4-B servo amplifiers are used.
2.3 Extension module connectable to the head module
CAUTION Do not connect the extension modules exceeding the maximum number of connectable modules to the head module. Otherwise, the modules may malfunction.
(1) Connectable extension modules
The following table lists the extension modules connectable to the MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H head module.
Model Name
MR-MT2100 I/O module
MR-MT2200 Pulse I/O module
MR-MT2300 Analog I/O module
MR-MT2400 Encoder I/F module
(2) The connectable number of extension modules
The following describes the connectable number of extension modules.
Up to four extension modules can be connected to one head module.
No restrictions are applied to the connection order of extension modules.
When MR-MT2400 is used, up to two MR-MT2400 modules can be connected to one head module.
Do not connect the extension modules in the axis mode and station mode together to one head module. (When MR-MT2200 is used in the axis mode, other extension modules or MR-MT2200 modules in the station mode cannot be connected to one head module.)
When the station mode is selected, refer to section 2.4.1 for the number of connectable stations.
When the axis mode is selected, refer to section 2.4.2 for the number of connectable axes.
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2 - 3
2.4 Maximum number of connections on a network
POINT
When MR-MT2200 is used in the axis mode, no restrictions are applied to the number of connectable stations because one MR-MT2200 module is handled as an axis just like servo amplifiers.
2.4.1 Station mode
The following table lists the number of connectable stations of the sensing module in one SSCNET III/H system.
SSCNET III/H communication cycle [ms] Number of connectable
stations
0.888 or more Max. 4
0.444 Max. 2
0.222 Max. 1
Servo system controller
Servo amplifiers Station 1
Station 2 Station 3
Station 4
Max. four stations (The number of stations depends on the
SSCNET III/H communication cycle.)
For the sensing module, each extension module occupies one station. When the head module and an extension module are used together, one station is occupied by the combination of the head module and the extension module next to it. However, when the head module is used alone, the head module itself occupies one station. The following shows how stations are counted.
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2 - 4
Examples of how stations are counted
One head module
One head module + One extension
module
One head module + Four extension modules
Two head modules + Two extension modules each for one
head module (four extension modules in total)
Configuration diagram
Station 1
Station 1
Station 1 Station 2
Station 3 Station 4
Station 1 Station 3 Station 2 Station 4
Number of occupied stations
1 station 1 station 4 stations 4 stations
One system allows up to four blocks to be connected.
Servo system controller
1 block
Max. four blocks
1 block 1 block1 block
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2 - 5
2.4.2 Axis mode (settable only when MR-MT2200 is connected)
POINT
When MR-MT2200 is used in the axis mode, up to four axes can be connected to one head module.
Up to two axes can be connected to one MR-MT2200 module. However, when the feedback pulse input is used, only one axis can be connected to one MR- MT2200 module.
The number of connectable axes in one system depends on the maximum number of axes of the controller. No restrictions are applied to the number of connectable head modules in one system.
The maximum number of connectable axes in one SSCNET III/H system is equal to the maximum number of connectable axes of the servo system controller. The number of axes per one system is the total number of axes of general-purpose pulse train drivers connected to MR-MT2200 modules and servo amplifiers.
Servo system controller
Servo amplifiers Axis 3 Axis 4 Axis 5 Axis 6(Note) Axis 1 Axis 2
General-purpose pulse train drivers
+ Motors
Note. Set the start axis number with the station number selection rotary switches (SW1/SW2) of the head module.
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2 - 6
When the MR-MT2200 pulse I/O module is used in the axis mode, up to four axes can be connected to one head module.
When feedback pulses are not inputted (When two axes are connected to one MR-MT2200
module)
When feedback pulses are inputted (When one axis is connected to one MR-MT2200 module)
Axis 1/ Axis 2
Axis 3/ Axis 4
Max. four axes
General-purpose pulse train drivers
+ Motors
Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4
General-purpose pulse train drivers
+ Motors
Max. four axes
2.5 Compatible servo system controller
POINT
When the sensing module is connected to a servo system controller, set the communication type of the servo system controller to "SSCNET III/H". The sensing module cannot be connected to the servo system controller with "SSCNET III".
Product name Model OS Software version
R16MTCPU
Motion CPU R32MTCPU SW10DNC-RMTFW 09 or later
R64MTCPU
2.6 Engineering software
POINT
MELSOFT MT Works2 cannot be connected directly to the sensing module. Connect MELSOFT MT Works2 via the controller and execute settings and diagnoses.
MELSOFT MT Works2 is necessary for the settings and diagnoses of the sensing module.
Product name Model Software version
MELSOFT MT Works2 SW1DND-MTW2-_ 1.128J or later
3. INSTALLATION
3 - 1
3. INSTALLATION
WARNING
To prevent electric shock, ground each equipment securely.
CAUTION
Do not connect extension modules exceeding the maximum number of connectable modules to the head module. Otherwise, the modules may malfunction.
Install the sensing module on incombustible material. Installing it directly or close to combustibles will lead to a fire.
Install the sensing module in a load-bearing place in accordance with the Instruction Manual.
Do not get on or put heavy load on the equipment. Otherwise, it may cause injury.
Use the sensing module within the specified environment. For the environment, refer to section 1.3.
Provide an adequate protection to prevent screws and other conductive matter, oil and other combustible matter from entering the sensing module.
Do not block intake and exhaust areas of the sensing module. Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction.
Do not drop or strike the sensing module. Isolate it from all impact loads.
Do not install or operate the sensing module which has been damaged or has any parts missing.
When the sensing module has been stored for an extended period of time, contact your local sales office.
When handling the sensing module, be careful about the edged parts such as corners of the sensing module.
The sensing module must be installed in a metal cabinet.
When fumigants that contain halogen materials, such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine, are used for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects, they cause malfunction when entering our products. Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter our products, or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation, such as heat treatment. Additionally, disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing the products.
3.1 Connection and removal of modules
CAUTION
Check that coupling hooks at the top and bottom of a module have been securely locked. Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction, failure, and drop of the module.
Do not directly touch conductive areas and electronic parts of modules. Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction and failure of the modules.
The number of times to connect and remove a module must be 50 times or less after the beginning of use of the product (in accordance with IEC 61131-2). Otherwise, the module may malfunction.
Shut off the external power supply used in the system before connecting and removing a module. Otherwise, it may cause an electric shock or a malfunction of the module.
3. INSTALLATION
3 - 2
The following describes how to connect and remove each module of the sensing module. (1) How to connect a module
Connector cover
(a) Remove the connector cover of the head module.
Extension module's side connector
Coupling hook
Coupling hook
Head module's side connector
Guide
Guide
(b) Align the extension unit's coupling hook and the head unit's guide and connect the unit by connecting the connectors on the side. When connecting multiple extension units, align the extension unit's coupling hook to the guide and connect the connectors on the side.
3. INSTALLATION
3 - 3
Coupling hook
Connector cover
(c) Make sure that the clips of the two coupling hooks at the top and bottom are securely fit to the guides of the other module.
(d) Attach a connector cover to the rightmost extension module after connecting the necessary number of extension modules. The printed character string "PULL" should be at the top of the connector cover. Be careful in the attachment direction of the connector cover.
(2) How to remove a module
Coupling hook
Coupling hook
Coupling hook
(a) Push the PUSH button of the coupling hooks at the top and bottom of the module to unlock them, and then remove the module.
3. INSTALLATION
3 - 4
3.2 How to mount a module
3.2.1 Mounting a module on a DIN rail
CAUTION Check if the sliding hooks of the module have been securely locked on the DIN rail. Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction and drop of the module.
(1) How to mount a module on a DIN rail
DIN rail
Sliding hook
DIN rail
Wall Sliding hook
Sliding hook
Wall
Sliding hook
(Mounted)
(a) Horizontally push the module against the DIN rail until the sliding hooks click.
3. INSTALLATION
3 - 5
(2) How to remove a module from a DIN rail
DIN rail
Wall
Sliding hook (Bottom)
DIN rail
Wall
(a) Pull down the bottom sliding hook. (b) Pull the module toward you.
DIN rail
Wall
(c) Lift up and remove the module.
3. INSTALLATION
3 - 6
3.2.2 Mounting a module with screws
CAUTION Securely pull out the sliding hooks at the top and bottom of a module until they click. Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction and drop of the module.
Sliding hook
Screw hole
Screw hole
(1) Pull out the sliding hooks on the back of the module until they click and are fixed.
When the head module is used alone
Tighten screws at the four corners of the block.
When the head module is used with extension modules connected
(2) Tighten the modules with screws. Tighten the modules with screws at the four corners of the block when
the head module is used with extension modules connected.
3. INSTALLATION
3 - 7
3.3 Installation direction and clearances
CAUTION
The equipment must be installed in the specified direction. Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction.
Maintain specified clearances between the module and the inner surfaces of a control cabinet or other equipment. Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction.
(1) When one block is installed
Top
Bottom
Wiring allowance 80 mm or more
10 mm or more
40 mm or more
40 mm or more
Cabinet Cabinet
10 mm or more
(2) When two or more blocks are installed
Top
Bottom
10 mm or more
40 mm or more
40 mm or more
Cabinet
(Note)
10 mm or more
Note. Close mounting is possible.
3. INSTALLATION
3 - 8
3.4 SSCNET III cable connection
POINT
Do not look directly at the light emitted from the CN1A and CN1B connectors of the MR-MT2010 and the end of the SSCNET III cable. The light can be a discomfort when it enters the eyes.
(1) SSCNET III cable connection
For the CN1A connector of MR-MT2010, connect the SSCNET III cable connected to a controller, a servo amplifier at the previous station, or the head module of the sensing module. Put an accessory cap to the CN1B connector of the servo amplifier or the head module of the sensing module in the final station.
Sensing module of the last stationSensing module
SSCNET III cable
Controller
Servo amplifier
CN1B
CN1A
SSCNET III cable
CN1B
CN1A
SSCNET III cable
CN1B
CN1A
Cap
3. INSTALLATION
3 - 9
(2) How to connect/disconnect cables
POINT
The CN1A and CN1B connectors of MR-MT2010 are capped to protect light devices inside the connectors from dust. For this reason, do not remove a cap until just before connecting an SSCNET III cable. Be sure to put the cap when the SSCNET III cable is removed.
While the SSCNET III cable is connected, keep the caps for the CN1A and CN1B connectors and protective tubes for the optical cord ends in a plastic bag with a slide fastener provided with the SSCNET III cable to protect them from dirt.
When requesting repair of MR-MT2010 due to malfunctions, make sure to cap the CN1A and CN1B connectors. When the caps are not put on the connectors, the light device may be damaged in transit. The light device needs to be replaced for repair if damaged.
(a) Connecting cables
1) The SSCNET III cable is shipped with protective tubes on the optical cord ends of the connectors. Remove the tubes.
2) Remove the CN1A and CN1B connector caps of MR-MT2010.
3) While holding a tab on the SSCNET III cable connector, insert the connector to the CN1A and
CN1B of MR-MT2010 until you hear a clicking sound. If the optical cord ends are dirty, optical transmission is interrupted, causing a malfunction. When they are dirty, wipe with a bonded textile, etc. Do not use a solvent such as alcohol.
Click
Tab
CN1A
CN1B
CN1A
CN1B
(b) Disconnection Pull out the SSCNET III cable connector while holding a tab on the connector. When the SSCNET III cable is removed from MR-MT2010, be sure to put caps on the connectors to protect them from dusts. Attach the protective tubes on the optical cord ends of the connectors.
3. INSTALLATION
3 - 10
3.5 How to wire connectors
(1) Connecting and disconnecting cables Use the accessory connectors for wiring.
Model Accessory connector
MR-MT2010 CN2 DFMC-1,5/12-STF-3,5 or equivalent (Phoenix Contact)
MR-MT2100 CN1 DFMC-1,5/9-STF-3,5 or equivalent (Phoenix Contact)
CN2 DFMC-1,5/10-STF-3,5 or equivalent (Phoenix Contact)
MR-MT2200 CN1 DFMC-1,5/12-STF-3,5 or equivalent (Phoenix Contact)
CN2 DFMC-1,5/12-STF-3,5 or equivalent (Phoenix Contact)
MR-MT2300
CN1 DFMC-1,5/8-STF-3,5 or equivalent (Phoenix Contact)
CN2 DFMC-1,5/8-STF-3,5 or equivalent (Phoenix Contact)
CNP1 DFMC-1,5/4-STF-3,5 or equivalent (Phoenix Contact)
MR-MT2400 CN1 DFMC-1,5/11-STF-3,5 or equivalent (Phoenix Contact)
CN2 DFMC-1,5/11-STF-3,5 or equivalent (Phoenix Contact)
(a) Fabrication on cable insulator
Use wires with the size of AWG 24 to 16 and strip the wires to make the stripped length 10 mm 0.5 mm at the ends of the wires.
(b) Inserting wires
While pressing the release button with a flat head screwdriver with the blade edge width of 2.0 mm to 2.5 mm, insert a wire all the way in. Then, remove the screwdriver. We recommend that you use the flat head screwdriver "model: SZS 0,4X2,5, product No.: 1205037" manufactured by Phoenix Contact.
Upper row
Release button Wire insertion hole Flat head
screwdriver Wire Remove the screwdriver
to connect the wire.
Lower row
(c) Disconnecting wires While pressing the release button with the flat head screwdriver, pull out the wire.
3. INSTALLATION
3 - 11
(2) Installing and removing a terminal block
Use a flat head screwdriver to loosen the terminal block installation screws and remove the terminal block. Use the flat head screwdriver to tighten the terminal block installation screws and install the terminal block. If the terminal block is not fixed securely, it may cause a drop, short-circuit, and malfunction.
3. INSTALLATION
3 - 12
3.6 Noise reduction techniques
(1) Grounding shield of shielded cables The following shows measures against malfunctions of the sensing module when the sensing module is installed near a device which generates excessive noise. Ground a shield of the shielded cable near the sensing module, and be careful that the cable after grounding should not be affected by electromagnetic induction of the cable before grounding. Partly remove the insulator of the shielded cable, and ground the exposed shielded part by making contact in a large area with the cabinet. You can also use clamp metal parts as shown in figure 5.2. Mask the painted internal wall of the cabinet that touches the clamp metal parts.
Shielded part
Screw
Clamp fitting
Shielded cable
Masked painted part
Figure 5.1 The shielded part to be exposed Figure 5.2 Grounding shields
Ground the shield of the signal input cable as close as possible (30 cm or less) to the sensing module.
Sensing module
AD75CK
Inside the cabinet
30 cm or less
3. INSTALLATION
3 - 13
(2) Ferrite core
A ferrite core has the effect of reducing conduction noise in the band around 10 MHz and radiated noise in the bands between 30 MHz to 100 MHz. When the shield effect of the shielded cable drawn out from the cabinet is not obtained enough or when emission of conduction noise from a power supply line should be suppressed, we recommend that you install the ferrite core. Install the ferrite core at the position of the cable shown in the following figure. If the installation position is incorrect, the ferrite core will not be effective.
120 mm or less
Ferrite core
Installing ferrite cores to the signal input wires and cables will suppress more noise. The following table lists a ferrite core as an example.
Model Impedance [] (Note)
ZCAT3035-1330 (TDK) 10 MHz to 100 MHz 100 MHz to 500 MHz
80 150
Note. The values (reference values) are measured with wires connected and not guaranteed
values.
ESD-SR-250 (NEC TOKIN) and E04SRM563218 (SEIWA ELECTRIC) can also be used. The effect of noise suppression rises as the number of passes though the ferrite core increases. Two or more passes are recommended.
One pass Two passes Three passes
3. INSTALLATION
3 - 14
MEMO
4. MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H HEAD MODULE
4 - 1
4. MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H HEAD MODULE
4.1 Summary
The MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H head module is used for SSCNET III/H communications. This module is necessary to use a sensing module. Connect extension modules to this module. This module can be used alone because it has digital I/Os. 4.2 Standard specifications
Item MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H head module
Control circuit power supply
Voltage 24 V DC
Permissible voltage fluctuation 24 V DC 10%
Current capacity 1.0 A (Note 1)
Communication interface SSCNET III/H
DI
Number of input points 12
Insulation method Photocoupler insulation
On voltage/on current 21 V DC or more/3 mA or more
Off voltage/off current 3 V DC or less/1 mA or less
Input response time Off On Within 1 s
On Off Within 1 s
Timing latch input Number of simultaneously used points
Max. 12 (Note 2)
Input form Sink input/source input
DO
Number of output points 2
Maximum load current 0.1 A/1 point
Insulation method Photocoupler insulation
Output response time (Note 3)
Off On Within 1 s
On Off Within 1 s
Output form Sink output
Interface power supply 24 V DC 10%
Compliance to global standards Refer to section 1.3.
Structure (IP rating) Refer to section 1.3.
Environment Refer to section 1.3.
Mass [kg] 0.2 Note 1. This is the maximum value of when four extension modules are connected to a head module. The current capacity can be
decreased by reducing the number of connected extension modules.
2. The number of the points will be four points when extension modules are connected.
3. This value is applicable when the output current is 50 mA or more.
4.3 Function list
The following table lists the functions of the MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H head module. For details and usage of the functions, refer to the manuals for controllers.
Function Description
Digital input function This function sends the status of digital input signals to the controller.
Digital output function This function turns on/off digital output signals using commands issued from the controller.
Timing-latch input function This function sends the timing to input digital input signals to the controller.
Level output function This function digitally outputs values depending on the level of each monitor value of the pulse I/O module, analog I/O module, and encoder I/F module. Values can be digitally output without the controller.
Output CLEAR/HOLD function This function sets whether to hold or clear the preceding outputs when communications with the controller are interrupted.
4. MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H HEAD MODULE
4 - 2
4.4 Parts identification
(1)
(6)
(5)
(7)
(2) (3)
(4)
(8)
No. Name/application Detailed
explanation
(1) Status display LED (RUN) Indicates the operating state of the module. Section
4.6 (2)
Status display LED (ERR) Indicates that an error has occurred in the module.
(3) Station number selection rotary switch (SW1) Use this switch and SW2 to set a start station number of the sensing module. Section
4.5 (4)
Station number selection rotary switch (SW2) Use this switch and SW1 to set a start station number of the sensing module.
(5) SSCNET III cable connector (CN1A) Connect the servo system controller, previous axis servo amplifier, or head module. Section
3.4 (6)
SSCNET III cable connector (CN1B) Connect the next axis servo amplifier or head module. Put a cap on this connector for the final module.
(7) Power supply and I/O signal connector (CN2) Connect the input power supply and digital I/O signals.
Section 4.7
(8) Inter-module connection connector (CN3) Connect extension modules to be used.
4. MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H HEAD MODULE
4 - 3
4.5 Station number selection rotary switch
POINT
Cycling the control circuit power supply enables the settings of the rotary switches.
Use the rotary switches (SW1 and SW2) of the MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H head module to set a start station number. Starting from the station number of the head module set with the rotary switches, sequentially assign the station number to each extension module connected to the head module. Each of the extension modules occupies one station.
(1)
(2)
No. Name/application
(1) Station number selection rotary switch (SW1) Use this switch and SW2 to set a start station number of the sensing module.
(2) Station number selection rotary switch (SW2) Use this switch and SW1 to set a start station number of the sensing module.
The following table lists the setting combinations of the rotary switches to set a station number.
Station number selection rotary switch Start station
No. 2nd station 3rd station 4th station
SW1 SW2
0
0 Station No. 1 Station No. 2 Station No. 3 Station No. 4
1 Station No. 2 Station No. 3 Station No. 4 Station No. 5
2 Station No. 3 Station No. 4 Station No. 5 Station No. 6
3 Station No. 4 Station No. 5 Station No. 6 Station No. 7
4 Station No. 5 Station No. 6 Station No. 7 Station No. 8
5 Station No. 6 Station No. 7 Station No. 8 Station No. 9
6 Station No. 7 Station No. 8 Station No. 9 Station No. 10
7 Station No. 8 Station No. 9 Station No. 10 Station No. 11
8 Station No. 9 Station No. 10 Station No. 11 Station No. 12
9 Station No. 10 Station No. 11 Station No. 12 Station No. 13
6
0 Station No. 61 Station No. 62 Station No. 63 Station No. 64
1 Station No. 62 Station No. 63 Station No. 64 (Note)
2 Station No. 63 Station No. 64 (Note)
3 Station No. 64 (Note)
4 (Note)
Note. Set the station number of the sensing module in decimal numbers. When the station
number is set to a value other than "0 (d)" to "63 (d)" or the 65th station or later is
connected, [AL. 11.1 Station number setting error] will occur.
4. MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H HEAD MODULE
4 - 4
4.6 Status display LEDs
The module status is displayed by the following two LEDs.
(1)
(2)
No. Display LED color Status Meaning
(1) RUN Green
Flickering The module has been properly powered on and is waiting for a network connection.
On The module has been properly powered on and has a network connection.
Off The module has not been properly powered on.
(2) ERR Red
Flickering A warning has occurred in the head module.
On An alarm has occurred in the head module.
Off The module normally operates at power-on.
When the module is powered on When the module is powered on, both the RUN and ERR LEDs turn on. When the head module is ready to communicate with extension modules without any error, the ERR LED turns off.
When a watchdog error has occurred When a watchdog error has occurred, the RUN LED turns off and the ERR LED turns on.
4. MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H HEAD MODULE
4 - 5
4.7 Signals and wiring
4.7.1 Pin assignment
(1) Power supply and I/O signal connector (CN2)
24 12
23 11
22 10
21 9
20 8
19 7
18 6
17 5
16 4
15 3
14 2
13 1
Pin assignment of CN2
No. Symbol Symbol No.
13 DI1 DI2 1
14 DI3 DI4 2
15 DI5 DI6 3
16 DI7 DI8 4
17 DI9 DI10 5
18 DI11 DI12 6
19 DICOM DICOM 7
20 DO1 DO2 8
21 DOCOM(-) DOCOM(-) 9
22 CTL(+) DOCOM(-) 10
23 24 V(+) 24G 11
24 FG FG 12
4. MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H HEAD MODULE
4 - 6
4.7.2 Signal (device) explanations
(1) Input device
Device Symbol Connector
pin No. Function and application
I/O
division
DI1 CN2-13 External input signal with the timing-latch input function Input digital input signals.
DI-1
DI2 CN2-1
DI3 CN2-14
DI4 CN2-2
DI5 CN2-15
DI6 CN2-3
DI7 CN2-16
DI8 CN2-4
DI9 CN2-17
DI10 CN2-5
DI11 CN2-18
DI12 CN2-6
(2) Output device
Device Symbol Connector
pin No. Function and application
I/O
division
DO1 CN2-20 External output signal
Digital output signals are outputted. DO-1
DO2 CN2-8
(3) Power supply
Signal name Symbol Connector
pin No. Function and application
Common terminal for input signals
DICOM CN2-7
CN2-19
Common terminals for input signals. Input 24 V DC (24 V DC 10%) for I/O interface. The power supply capacity changes depending on the number of I/O interface points to be used. For sink interface, connect + of 24 V DC external power supply. For source interface, connect - of the 24 V DC external power supply.
Interface power supply input
CTL(+) CN2-22 Input 24 V DC (24 V DC 10%) for I/O interface. Connect + of the 24 V DC external power supply.
Common terminal for output signals
DOCOM (-)
CN2-9 CN2-10 CN2-21
Common terminals for output signals. Connect - of the 24 V DC external power supply.
Control circuit power supply
24 V(+) CN2-23 Input 24 V DC (24 V DC 10%) for the control circuit power supply. Connect + of the 24 V DC external power supply.
24G CN2-11 Input 24 V DC (24 V DC 10%) for the control circuit power supply. Connect - of the 24 V DC external power supply.
Grounding FG CN2-12 CN2-24
Grounding terminal. Ground it.
4. MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H HEAD MODULE
4 - 7
4.7.3 Connections of the power circuit
24 V power supply for interface
24 V(+)
24G
FG FG
CTL(+)
DOCOM(-) 9, 10, or 21
(Note) Circuit protector
24 V power supply for control circuit power supply
22
CN2
23
11
12 or 24
24 V(+)
24G
Inter-module FG
connection fitting
MR-MT2010
CN3
Note. Circuit protectors are required for protecting power supplies, wires, sensing modules, and
others. When not using circuit protectors, configure an external protective circuit such as a
power supply with protective functions.
The following table lists a recommended circuit protector.
Circuit protector (Note)
CP30-BA 1P 1-MD 2A
Note. Use an inertia delay type circuit protector.
4. MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H HEAD MODULE
4 - 8
4.7.4 Detailed explanation of interfaces
This section provides the details of the I/O signal interfaces (refer to the I/O division in the table) given in section 4.7.2. Refer to this section and make connection with the external device. (1) Digital input interface DI-1
(a) Sink input interface Transmit signals from sink (open-collector) type transistor output, relay switch, etc.
Digital input
4.7 K
2.2 K
150
DI_
DICOM 24 V DC 10%
For transistor Approx. 5 mA
VCE(sat) 1.0 V
SW TR
10 m or less
MR-MT2010
(b) Source input interface Transmit signals from source (open-collector) type transistor outputs, relay switches, etc.
Digital input
4.7 K
2.2 K
150
DI_
DICOM 24 V DC 10%
For transistor Approx. 5 mA
VCE(sat) 1.0 V
SW TR
10 m or less
MR-MT2010
4. MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H HEAD MODULE
4 - 9
(2) Digital output interface DO-1
(a) Sink output interface When the output FET is turned on, the current will flow to the drain terminal. Lamps, relays, or photocouplers can be driven. Install a diode (D) for an inductive load, or install an inrush current suppressing resistor (R) for a lamp load. (Rated current: 60 mA or less, maximum current: 75 mA or less, inrush current: 120 mA or less)
1) Inductive load
MR-MT2010 Inductive load
If polarity of diode is reversed, the head module will malfunction.
24 V
Digital output signal
DOCOM(-)
DO_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 75 mA
120 mA (peak) 10 m or less
2) Photocoupler
MR-MT2010
24 V
R
Digital output signal
DOCOM(-)
DO_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 75 mA
120 mA (peak) 10 m or less
3) Lamp load
MR-MT2010
24 V
R
Digital output signal
DOCOM(-)
DO_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 75 mA
120 mA (peak) For transistor
Lamp load
4. MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H HEAD MODULE
4 - 10
MEMO
5. MR-MT2100 I/O MODULE
5 - 1
5. MR-MT2100 I/O MODULE
5.1 Summary
The MR-MT2100 I/O module has a highly accurate (within 1 s) timing-latch input function. 5.2 Specification list
Item MR-MT2100 I/O module
Control circuit power supply Supplied from the head module (24 V DC 10%, 0.1 A)
DI
Number of input points 16 (Note 1)
Insulation method Photocoupler insulation
On voltage/on current 21 V DC or more/3 mA or more
Off voltage/off current 3 V DC or less/1 mA or less
Input response time Off On Within 1 s
On Off Within 1 s
Timing latch input Number of simultaneously used points
Max. 16
Input form Sink input/source input
DO
Number of output points 16 (Note 1)
Maximum load current 0.1 A/1 point
Insulation method Photocoupler insulation
Output response time (Note 2)
Sink output Off to On Within 1 s
On to Off Within 1 s
Source output (Note 3)
Off to On Within 1 s
On to Off Within 2 s
Output form Sink output/Source output (Note 3)
Interface power supply 24 V DC 10%
Compliance to global standards Refer to section 1.3.
Structure (IP rating) Refer to section 1.3.
Environment Refer to section 1.3.
Mass [kg] 0.2 Note 1. When the module is used at an ambient temperature exceeding 55 C and up to 60 C, the numbers of simultaneously on
points must be 14 or less for each of DI and DO.
2. This value is applicable when the output current is 50 mA or more.
3. Source output is available when connecting with head modules with software version A1 or later. Set the output method for
digital output with [Pr. PTB069].
5. MR-MT2100 I/O MODULE
5 - 2
5.3 Function list
The following lists the functions of the MR-MT2100 I/O module. For details and usage of the functions, refer to the manuals for controllers.
Function Description
Digital input function This function sends the status of digital input signals to the controller.
Digital output function This function turns on/off digital output signals using commands issued from the controller.
Timing-latch input function This function sends the timing to input digital input signals to the controller.
Level output function This function digitally outputs values depending on the level of each monitor value of the pulse I/O module, analog I/O module, and encoder I/F module. Values can be digitally output without the controller.
Output CLEAR/HOLD function This function sets whether to hold or clear the preceding outputs when communications with the controller are interrupted.
5.4 Parts identification
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(5) (6)
No. Name/application Detailed
explanation
(1) Status display LED (RUN) Indicates the operating status of the module. Section
5.5 (2)
Status display LED (ERR) Indicates that an error has occurred in the module.
(3) Digital input signal connector (CN1) Connect the digital input signals. Section
5.6 (4)
Digital output signal connector (CN2) Connect the digital output signals.
(5) Inter-module connection connector (CN3B) Connect with the head module or the preceding extension module.
(6) Inter-module connection connector (CN3A) Connect with the following extension module.
5. MR-MT2100 I/O MODULE
5 - 3
5.5 Status display LEDs
The module status is displayed by the following two LEDs.
(1)
(2)
No. Display LED color Status Meaning
(1) RUN
Green On The module has been properly powered on.
Orange On Initializing
Off The module has not been properly powered on.
(2) ERR
Red Flickering A warning has occurred.
On An alarm has occurred.
Orange On Initializing
Off The module normally operates at power-on.
When the module is powered on When the module is powered on, both the RUN and ERR LEDs turn on in orange and then show the status above after the initialization of MR-MT2100.
When a watchdog error has occurred When a watchdog error has occurred, both the RUN and ERR LEDs turn on in red.
5.6 Signals and wiring
5.6.1 Pin assignment
12
11
10
18
17
16
15
14
13
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
12
11
10
9
20
8
19
7
18
6
17
5
16
4
15
3
14
2
13
1
Pin assignment of CN1
No. Symbol Symbol No.
10 DI1 DI2 1
11 DI3 DI4 2
12 DI5 DI6 3
13 DI7 DI8 4
14 DI9 DI10 5
15 DI11 DI12 6
16 DI13 DI14 7
17 DI15 DI16 8
18 DICOM DICOM 9
Pin assignment of CN2
No. Symbol Symbol No.
11 DO1 DO2 1
12 DO3 DO4 2
13 DO5 DO6 3
14 DO7 DO8 4
15 DO9 DO10 5
16 DO11 DO12 6
17 DO13 DO14 7
18 DO15 DO16 8
19 DOCOM DOCOM 9
20 CTL(-) CTL(-) 10
5. MR-MT2100 I/O MODULE
5 - 4
5.6.2 Signal (device) explanations
(1) Input device
Device Symbol Connector
pin No. Function and application
I/O
division
DI1 CN1-10 External input signal with the timing-latch input function Input digital input signals.
DI-1
DI2 CN1-1
DI3 CN1-11
DI4 CN1-2
DI5 CN1-12
DI6 CN1-3
DI7 CN1-13
DI8 CN1-4
DI9 CN1-14
DI10 CN1-5
DI11 CN1-15
DI12 CN1-6
DI13 CN1-16
DI14 CN1-7
DI15 CN1-17
DI16 CN1-8
(2) Output device
Device Symbol Connector
pin No. Function and application
I/O
division
DO1 CN2-11 External output signal Digital output signals are outputted.
DO-1
DO2 CN2-1
DO3 CN2-12
DO4 CN2-2
DO5 CN2-13
DO6 CN2-3
DO7 CN2-14
DO8 CN2-4
DO9 CN2-15
DO10 CN2-5
DO11 CN2-16
DO12 CN2-6
DO13 CN2-17
DO14 CN2-7
DO15 CN2-18
DO16 CN2-8
5. MR-MT2100 I/O MODULE
5 - 5
(3) Power supply
Signal name Symbol Connector
pin No. Function and application
Common terminal for input signals
DICOM CN1-9
CN1-18
Common terminals for input signals. Input 24 V DC (24 V DC 10%) for I/O interface. The power supply capacity varies depending on the number of I/O interface points to be used. For sink interface, connect + of 24 V DC external power supply. For source interface, connect - of the 24 V DC external power supply.
Common terminal for output signals
DOCOM CN2-9
CN2-19
Common terminals for output signals. Input 24 V DC (24 V DC 10%) for I/O interface. The power supply capacity varies depending on the number of I/O interface points to be used. For sink interface, connect - of the 24 V DC external power supply. For source interface, connect + of the 24 V DC external power supply.
Interface power supply for output signal
CTL(-) CN2-10 CN2-20
Input 24 V DC (24 V DC 10%) for I/O interface. For sink interface, connection is unnecessary. For source interface, connect the - of the 24 V DC external power supply.
5.6.3 Connecting the interface power supply for output signal
CAUTION Set [Pr. PTB069] to the connection method corresponding to the actual output wiring. Otherwise, it may cause the equipment to operate unpredictably.
(1) For sink output interface
DOCOM and CTL(-) are not connected.
Not connected CTL(-)
DOCOM
10 or 20
9 or 19
CN2
MR-MT2100
(2) For source output interface Connect the 24 V power supply for the I/O interface between DOCOM and CTL(-).
24 V power supply for I/O interface CTL(-)
DOCOM
10 or 20
9 or 19
CN2
MR-MT2100
5. MR-MT2100 I/O MODULE
5 - 6
5.6.4 Detailed explanation of interfaces
This section provides the details of the I/O signal interfaces (refer to the I/O division in the table) given in section 5.6.2. Refer to this section and make connection with the external device. (1) Digital input interface DI-1
(a) Sink input interface Transmit signals from sink (open-collector) type transistor output, relay switch, etc.
Digital input
4.7 K
2.2 K
150
DI_
DICOM 24 V DC 10%
For transistor Approx. 5 mA
VCE(sat) 1.0 V
SW TR
10 m or less
MR-MT2100
(b) Source input interface Transmit signals from source (open-collector) type transistor outputs, relay switches, etc.
Digital input
4.7 K DI_
DICOM 24 V DC 10%
For transistor Approx. 5 mA
VCE(sat) 1.0 V
SW TR
10 m or less
MR-MT2100
2.2 K
150
5. MR-MT2100 I/O MODULE
5 - 7
(2) Digital output interface DO-1
(a) Sink output interface When the output FET is turned on, the current will flow to the drain terminal. Lamps, relays, or photocouplers can be driven. Install a diode (D) for an inductive load, or install an inrush current suppressing resistor (R) for a lamp load. (Rated current: 60 mA or less, maximum current: 75 mA or less, inrush current: 120 mA or less) A maximum of 1.6 V voltage drop occurs in MR-MT2100.
1) Inductive load
MR-MT2100 Inductive load
If polarity of diode is reversed, the I/O module will malfunction.
24 V (Note)
Digital output signal
DOCOM
10 m or less
DO_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 75 mA
120 mA (peak)
2) Photocoupler
MR-MT2100
24 V (Note)
R
Digital output signal
DO_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 75 mA
120 mA (peak)
DOCOM
10 m or less
3) Lamp load
MR-MT2100
24 V (Note)
R
Digital output signal
DO_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 75 mA
120 mA (peak)
DOCOM
Lamp load
10 m or less
Note. If the voltage drop (maximum of 1.6 V) interferes with the relay operation, apply a high voltage (maximum of 26.4 V) from external
source.
5. MR-MT2100 I/O MODULE
5 - 8
(b) Source output interface
When the output FET is turned on, the current will flow from the output terminal to a load. A lamp, relay, or photocoupler can be driven. Install a diode (D) for an inductive load, or install an inrush current suppressing resistor (R) for a lamp load. (Rated current: 60 mA or less, maximum current: 75 mA or less, inrush current: 120 mA or less) A maximum of 1.6 V voltage drop occurs in MR-MT2100.
1) Inductive load
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 75 mA
120 mA (peak)
10 m or less
MR-MT2100
Inductive load
If polarity of diode is reversed, I/O unit will malfunction.
24 V (Note)
Digital output signal
DOCOM
DO_
2) Photocoupler
MR-MT2100
24 V (Note)
Digital output signal R
DOCOM
DO_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 75 mA
120 mA (peak)
10 m or less
3) Lamp load
MR-MT2100
24 V (Note)
Digital output signal
Lamp load
R
DOCOM
DO_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 75 mA
120 mA (peak)
10 m or less
Note. If the voltage drop (maximum of 1.6 V) interferes with the relay operation, apply a high voltage (maximum of 26.4 V) from an
external source.
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 1
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6.1 Summary
The MR-MT2200 pulse I/O module can input/output pulses in each input/output type (forward/reverse rotation pulse train, signed pulse train, and A-phase/B-phase pulse train). The MR-MT2200 pulse I/O module has two modes: axis mode and station mode. In the axis mode, stepping motors can be driven through general-purpose pulse train drivers just like servo amplifier axes. 6.2 Standard specifications
Item MR-MT2200 pulse I/O module
Control circuit power supply Supplied from the head module (24 V DC 10%, 0.2 A)
Number of pulse I/O channels 2 output channels/2 input channels/1 channel each for input/output
(Select one.)
Pulse Output
Output signal Differential line driver output or open-collector output
Output form Forward/reverse rotation pulse train, signed pulse train, A-phase/B-
phase pulse train
Maximum frequency (Note 2)
Differential line driver output
4 Mpulses/s (A-phase/B-phase pulse train ( 4)) 1 Mpulse/s (forward/reverse rotation pulse train, signed pulse train)
Open-collector output 200 kpulses/s (A-phase/B-phase pulse train ( 4))
50 kpulses/s (forward/reverse rotation pulse train, signed pulse train)
Pulse Input
Input signal Differential line driver input
Input form Forward/reverse rotation pulse train, signed pulse train, A-phase/B-
phase pulse train
Maximum frequency
Differential line driver input
4 Mpulses/s (A-phase/B-phase pulse train ( 4)) 1 Mpulse/s (forward/reverse rotation pulse train, signed pulse train)
DI
Number of input points 7 points for each axis
Insulation method Photocoupler insulation
On voltage/on current 21 V DC or more/3 mA or more
Off voltage/off current 3 V DC or less/1 mA or less
Input form Sink input/source input
DO
Number of output points
Sink output 5 points for each axis (Two of the five points are shared with both the
high-speed output and open-collector pulse.)
Source output 3 points for each axis
Maximum load current 0.1 A/1 point
Insulation method Photocoupler insulation
High-speed output response time (Note 1)
Off On Within 1 s
On Off Within 1 s
Output form Sink output/source output
Interface power supply 24 V DC 10%
Compliance to global standards Refer to section 1.3.
Structure (IP rating) Refer to section 1.3.
Environment Refer to section 1.3.
Mass [kg] 0.2 Note 1. This is for when the output current is 50 mA or more.
2. When using the electronic gear in axis mode, the maximum frequency of the pulse output is determined by the settings of [Pr.
PA06], [Pr. PA07] and [Pr. PB01]. For details, refer to the Name and function column of [Pr. PA06] in section 9.2.2.
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 2
6.3 Function list
The following table lists the functions of the MR-MT2200 pulse I/O module. For details and usage of the functions, refer to the manuals for controllers.
Function Description
Pulse output function This function outputs specified pulses from the controller. Use parameters to set an output type (forward/reverse rotation pulse train, signed pulse train, or A-phase/B-phase pulse train).
Pulse input function This function sends the input number of pulses to the controller. Use parameters to set an input type (forward/reverse rotation pulse train, signed pulse train, or A-phase/B-phase pulse train).
Digital input function This function sends the status of digital input signals to the controller.
Digital output function This function turns on/off digital output signals using commands issued from the controller.
Pulse coincidence output function
This function turns on digital output signals when a pulse output value is within a range specified by the controller.
Output CLEAR/HOLD function This function sets whether to hold or clear the preceding outputs when communications with the controller are interrupted.
6.4 Parts identification
(1)
(4)
(5)
(2)
(6) (7)
(3)
No. Name/application Detailed
explanation
(1) A-axis status display LED (AX.A) Indicates the status of A-axis. Section
6.6 (2)
B-axis status display LED (AX.B) Indicates the status of B-axis.
(3) Mode select switch (SW1) The mode can be switched between axis and station.
Section 6.5.1
(4) A-axis pulse I/O signal connector (CN1) Connect the pulse I/O signals and A-axis digital I/O signals to this connector. Section
6.7 (5)
B-axis pulse I/O signal connector (CN2) Connect the pulse I/O signals and B-axis digital I/O signals to this connector.
(6) Inter-module connection connector (CN3B) Connect with the head module or the preceding extension module connected.
(7) Inter-module connection connector (CN3A) Connect with the following extension module.
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 3
6.5 Switching the mode between the station mode and axis mode
6.5.1 Mode select switch (SW1)
POINT
Cycling the control circuit power supply enables the settings of the switches.
Select the axis mode or station mode for the pulse I/O module, and set input/output status for the A/B-axis in the axis mode.
(1) (2)
No. Name/application
(1) Mode selection switch (SW1-1) Select the axis mode or station mode for the pulse I/O module.
(2) Mode selection switch (SW1-2) Select the axis mode or station mode for the pulse I/O module.
The following lists the setting combinations of the switches to set a mode.
Mode select switch Mode
Number of occupied axes
Description (SW1-1) (SW1-2)
Off Off Axis mode 2
A-axis and B-axis are used in the axis mode. Feedback pulse input is not used. (Default setting) CN1: A-axis pulse output CN2: B-axis pulse output
Off On Axis mode 1 A-axis is used in the axis mode. CN1: A-axis pulse output CN2: A-axis feedback pulse input
On Off Axis mode 1 B-axis is used in the axis mode. CN1: B-axis feedback pulse input CN2: B-axis pulse output
On On Station mode 0 (Note)
A-axis and B-axis are used in the station mode. Set the I/O switching settings of A-axis and B-axis with parameters ([Pr. PTC001] for A-axis and [Pr. PTC017] for B-axis). Refer to section 6.5.2 (1) for setting details.
Note. Axis is not occupied. One station is occupied.
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 4
6.5.2 Settings in the station mode
CAUTION The parameter setting should match with the actual I/O connections to operate properly. Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction.
(1) I/O switching setting
When the station mode is selected with SW1, set the parameters for A-axis (CN1) and B-axis (CN2) whether to input or output pulses.
Pulse I/O function selection
Select an I/O function with [Pr. PTC001] for A-axis and [Pr. PTC017] for B-axis.
I/O function selection 0: Pulse input function 1: Pulse output function
[Pr. PTC001]/[Pr. PTC017]
0 0 0
(2) Open-collector pulse output terminal function switching setting
POINT
When the digital output is selected with [Pr. PTC005] for A-axis and [Pr. PTC021] for B-axis, digital output is executed according to the settings of [Pr. PTC071] to [Pr. PTC074] and [Pr. PTC081] to [Pr. PTC084].
When using the pulse I/O unit in station mode, the axis set to pulse output in I/O switching setting can be switched by setting the output function of the open collector pulse output terminal (CW_/CCW_) with the parameter.
Open-collector output function selection
Select a pulse output form with [Pr. PTC005] for A-axis and [Pr. PTC021] for B-axis.
Open-collector output function selection 0: Pulse output (A-axis: CWA and CCWA,
B-axis: CWB and CCWB) 1: Digital output (A-axis: DO4 and DO5,
B-axis: DO11 and DO12)
[Pr. PTC005]/[Pr. PTC021]
0 0 0
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 5
6.6 Status display LEDs
(1) In axis mode The module status is displayed by the following two LEDs.
(1)
(2)
No. Display LED color Status Meaning
(1) AX.A
Green
Flickering The module has been properly powered on and A-axis is the servo-off status.
On The module has been properly powered on and A-axis is the servo-on status.
Red Flickering A warning has occurred in A-axis.
On An alarm has occurred in A-axis.
Orange On Initializing
Off The module has not been properly powered on.
(2) AX.B
Green Flickering
The module has been properly powered on and B-axis is the servo-off status.
On The module has been properly powered on and B-axis is the servo-on status.
Red Flickering A warning has occurred in B-axis.
On An alarm has occurred in B-axis.
Orange On Initializing
Off The module has not been properly powered on.
When the module is powered on When the module is powered on, both the AX.A and AX.B LEDs turn on in orange and then show the status above after the initialization of MR-MT2200.
When a watchdog error has occurred When a watchdog error has occurred, both the AX.A and AX.B LEDs turn on in red.
(2) In station mode
The module status is displayed by the following two LEDs.
(1)
(2)
No. Display LED color Status Meaning
(1) AX.A
Green On The module has been properly powered on.
Red Flickering A warning has occurred in A-axis.
On An alarm has occurred in A-axis.
Orange On Initializing
Off The module has not been properly powered on.
(2) AX.B
Green On The module has been properly powered on.
Red Flickering A warning has occurred in B-axis.
On An alarm has occurred in B-axis.
Orange On Initializing
Off The module has not been properly powered on.
When the module is powered on When the module is powered on, both the AX.A and AX.B LEDs turn on in orange and then show the status above after the initialization of MR-MT2200.
When a watchdog error has occurred When a watchdog error has occurred, both the AX.A and AX.B LEDs turn on in red.
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 6
6.7 Signals and wiring
6.7.1 Pin assignment
(1) In axis mode
12
11
10
9
20
21
22
23
24
8
19 7
18 6
17 5
16 4
15 3
14 2
13 1
12
11
10
18
17
16
15
14
13
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
19
20
21
22
23
24
Pin assignment of CN1
No. Symbol Symbol No.
13 CCWA CWA 1
14 CCWGA CWGA 2
15 CWNA/FANA CWPA/FAPA 3
16 CCWNA/FBNA CCWPA/FBPA 4
17 LG ALM05A 5
18 DICOM05A PG05A 6
19 INPA ALM24A 7
20 RDA PG24A 8
21 RLSA FLSA 9
22 DICOMA DOGA 10
23 CRA SONA 11
24 DOCOMA RESA 12
Pin assignment of CN2
No. Symbol Symbol No.
13 CCWB CWB 1
14 CCWGB CWGB 2
15 CWNB/FANB CWPB/FAPB 3
16 CCWNB/FBNB CCWPB/FBPB 4
17 LG ALM05B 5
18 DICOM05B PG05B 6
19 INPB ALM24B 7
20 RDB PG24B 8
21 RLSB FLSB 9
22 DICOMB DOGB 10
23 CRB SONB 11
24 DOCOMB RESB 12
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 7
(2) In station mode
12
11
10
9
20
21
22
23
24
8
19 7
18 6
17 5
16 4
15 3
14 2
13 1
12
11
10
18
17
16
15
14
13
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
19
20
21
22
23
24
Pin assignment of CN1
No. Symbol Symbol No.
13 CCWA/DO5A CWA/DO4A 1
14 CCWGA/DO5GA CWGA/DO4GA 2
15 CWNA/FANA CWPA/FAPA 3
16 CCWNA/FBNA CCWPA/FBPA 4
17 LG DI105A 5
18 DICOM05A DI205A 6
19 DI5A DI1A 7
20 DI6A DI2A 8
21 DI7A DI3A 9
22 DICOMA DI4A 10
23 DO3A DO1A 11
24 DOCOMA DO2A 12
Pin assignment of CN2
No. Symbol Symbol No.
13 CCWB/DO5B CWB/DO4B 1
14 CCWGB/DO5GB CWGB/DO4GB 2
15 CWNB/FANB CWPB/FAPB 3
16 CCWNB/FBNB CCWPB/FBPB 4
17 LG DI105B 5
18 DICOM05B DI205B 6
19 DI5B DI1B 7
20 DI6B DI2B 8
21 DI7B DI3B 9
22 DICOMB DI4B 10
23 DO3B DO1B 11
24 DOCOMB DO2B 12
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 8
6.7.2 Signal (device) explanations
(1) In axis mode (a) Input device
Device Symbol
Connector pin No. Function and application
I/O
division A-axis B-axis
Feedback pulse
FAP_ CN1-3 CN2-3 Input feedback pulses. When using feedback pulses, set the mode select switch (SW1). The feedback pulse input form can be changed using [Pr. PB17]. DI-1
FAN_ CN1-15 CN2-15
FBP_ CN1-4 CN2-4
FBN_ CN1-16 CN2-16
Malfunction
ALM24_ CN1-7 CN2-7 Input the alarm output of the connected driver. When a driver alarm is detected, the pulse I/O module generates an alarm and stops the pulse output. When using this device, set [Pr. PB16]. DI-2
ALM05_ CN1-5 CN2-5
Zero-point signal PG24_ CN1-8 CN2-8 Input the home position signal at home position return.
PG05_ CN1-6 CN2-6
Ready RD_ CN1-20 CN2-20
Input device for controlling a driver. Turn this signal on when the driver is ready to receive the pulse. Pulses are not outputted until RD_ (Ready) is turned on. When using this device, set [Pr. PB16].
DI-3
Upper stroke limit FLS_ CN1-9 CN2-9 The upper stroke limit and lower stroke limit can be connected to the pulse I/O module and used. The signal is enabled by the controller-side setting. Input the upper stroke limit and lower stroke limit. For details, refer to the controller users manual.
Lower stroke limit RLS_ CN1-21 CN2-21
Proximity dog DOG_ CN1-10 CN2-10
The proximity dog signal can be connected to the pulse I/O module and used. The signal is enabled by the controller-side setting. Input the proximity dog signal. For details, refer to the controller users manual.
In-position INP_ CN1-19 CN2-19
Input device for controlling a driver. Input the in-position signal. The input information is used on the controller side. When using this device, set [Pr. PB16].
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 9
(b) Output device
Device Symbol
Connector pin No. Function and application
I/O
division A-axis B-axis
Command pulse
CW_ CN1-1 CN2-1 Outputs the command pulse.
For open-collector type (max. output frequency of 500 kpulses/s) Forward rotation pulse train between CW and CWG Reverse rotation pulse train between CCW and CCWG
Change the command pulse output form with [Pr. PB14]. Pulse output control is performed after SSCNET III/H communications are established.
DO-2 CWG_ CN1-2 CN2-2
CCW_ CN1-13 CN2-13
CCWG_ CN1-14 CN2-14
CWP_ CN1-3 CN2-3 Outputs the command pulse.
For differential line driver type (max. output frequency of 4 Mpulses/s) Forward rotation pulse train between CWP and CWN Reverse rotation pulse train between CCWP and CCWN
Change the command pulse output form with [Pr. PB14]. Pulse output control is performed after SSCNET III/H communications are established.
DO-3 CWN_ CN1-15 CN2-15
CCWP_ CN1-4 CN2-4
CCWN_ CN1-16 CN2-16
Reset RES_ CN1-12 CN2-12 Outputs the alarm reset command from the controller.
DO-1
Servo-on SON_ CN1-11 CN2-11
Output device for controlling a driver. Outputs the servo-on command from the controller. By connecting this device to the servo-on input of the driver, servo- on control is possible from the controller.
Clear CR_ CN1-23 CN2-23
Output device for controlling a driver. Outputs the clear command from the controller. Clears the droop pulses of the servo amplifier at home position return.
(c) Power supply
Signal name Symbol
Connector pin No.
Function and application
Common terminal for input signals
DICOM05_ CN1-18 CN2-18
Common terminals for input signals. When DI-2 of I/O division is used, input the I/O interface power supply. The power supply capacity varies depending on the number of I/O interface points to be used. For 24 V input (24 V DC 10%) For sink interface, connect + of 24 V DC external power supply. For source interface, connect - of the 24 V DC external power supply. For 5 V input (5 V DC 10%) For sink interface, connect + of 5 V DC external power supply. For source interface, connect - of the 5 V DC external power supply.
DICOM_ CN1-22 CN2-22
Common terminals for input signals. When DI-3 of I/O division is used, input 24 V DC (24 V DC 10%) for I/O interface. The power supply capacity varies depending on the number of I/O interface points to be used. For sink interface, connect + of 24 V DC external power supply. For source interface, connect - of the 24 V DC external power supply.
Common terminal for output signals
DOCOM_ CN1-24 CN2-24
Common terminals for output signals. When DO-1 of I/O division is used, input 24 V DC (24 V DC 10%) for I/O interface. The power supply capacity varies depending on the number of I/O interface points to be used. For sink interface, connect - of the 24 V DC external power supply. For source interface, connect + of the 24 V DC external power supply.
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 10
(2) In station mode
(a) Input device
Device Symbol Connector pin No.
Function and application I/O
division A-axis B-axis
Pulse input
FAP_ CN1-3 CN2-3 Input pulses to be counted.
DI-1 FAN_ CN1-15 CN2-15
FBP_ CN1-4 CN2-4
FBN_ CN1-16 CN2-16
DI1_ CN1-7 CN2-7 External (5 V/24 V) input signal For 24 V input, use DI1_ and DI2_. For 5 V input, use DI105_ and DI205_. Refer to section 6.7.3 (2) for details.
DI-2 DI2_ CN1-8 CN2-8
DI105_ CN1-5 CN2-5
DI205_ CN1-6 CN2-6
DI3_ CN1-10 CN2-10 External (24 V) input signal
DI-3
DI4_ CN1-19 CN2-19
DI5_ CN1-9 CN2-9
DI6_ CN1-20 CN2-20
DI7_ CN1-21 CN2-21
(b) Output device
Device Symbol
Connector pin No. Function and application
I/O
division A-axis B-axis
DO1_ CN1-11 CN2-11 External output signal
DO-1 DO2_ CN1-12 CN2-12
DO3_ CN1-23 CN2-23
DO4_ CN1-1 CN2-1 External output signals supporting the pulse coincidence output. These signals are mutually exclusive with the pulse output (CW_ and CCW_).
DO-2
DO4G_ CN1-2 CN2-2
DO5_ CN1-13 CN2-13
DO5G_ CN1-14 CN2-14
Pulse output
CW_ CN1-1 CN2-1 Outputs the command pulse.
For open-collector type (max. output frequency of 500 kpulses/s) Forward rotation pulse train between CW and CWG Reverse rotation pulse train between CCW and CCWG
Change the command pulse output form with [Pr. PTC004] and [Pr. PTC020]. Pulse output control is performed after SSCNET III/H communications are established.
CWG_ CN1-2 CN2-2
CCW_ CN1-13 CN2-13
CCWG_ CN1-14 CN2-14
CWP_ CN1-3 CN2-3 Outputs the command pulse.
For differential line driver type (max. output frequency of 4 Mpulses/s) Forward rotation pulse train between CWP and CWN Reverse rotation pulse train between CCWP and CCWN
Change the command pulse output form with [Pr. PTC004] and [Pr. PTC020]. Pulse output control is performed after SSCNET III/H communications are established.
DO-3
CWN_ CN1-15 CN2-15
CCWP_ CN1-4 CN2-4
CCWN_ CN1-16 CN2-16
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 11
(c) Power supply
Signal name Symbol
Connector pin No.
Function and application
Common terminal for input signals
DICOM05_ CN1-18 CN2-18
Common terminals for input signals. When DI-2 of I/O division is used, input the I/O interface power supply. The power supply capacity varies depending on the number of I/O interface points to be used. For 24 V input (24 V DC 10%) For sink interface, connect + of 24 V DC external power supply. For source interface, connect - of the 24 V DC external power supply. For 5 V input (5 V DC 10%) For sink interface, connect + of 5 V DC external power supply. For source interface, connect - of the 5 V DC external power supply.
DICOM_ CN1-22 CN2-22
Common terminals for input signals. When DI-3 of I/O division is used, input 24 V DC (24 V DC 10%) for I/O interface. The power supply capacity varies depending on the number of I/O interface points to be used. For sink interface, connect + of 24 V DC external power supply. For source interface, connect - of the 24 V DC external power supply.
Common terminal for output signals
DOCOM_ CN1-24 CN2-24
Common terminals for output signals. When DO-1 of I/O division is used, input 24 V DC (24 V DC 10%) for I/O interface. The power supply capacity varies depending on the number of I/O interface points to be used. For sink interface, connect - of the 24 V DC external power supply. For source interface, connect + of the 24 V DC external power supply.
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 12
6.7.3 Detailed explanation of interfaces
This section provides the details of the I/O signal interfaces (refer to the I/O division in the table) given in section 6.7.2. Refer to this section and make connection with the external device. (1) Feedback pulse input interface DI-1
FAP_
MR-MT2200
150 []
Driver feedback output signal
General-purpose pulse train driver
FBP_
150 [] FBN_
FAN_
AM26LS32 or equivalentAM26LS31 or
equivalent
10 m or less
Check the specifications of the general-purpose pulse train driver to be connected.
LG
Driver feedback output signal
Feedback input signal
Feedback input signal
(Note)
Note. Connect the cable shield directly to FG.
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 13
(2) Digital (24 V/5 V) input interface DI-2
(a) Sink input interface Transmit signals from sink (open-collector) type transistor output, relay switch, etc.
1) For 5 V
Digital input
470
2.2 K
ALM05_
DICOM05_
For transistor Approx. 5 mA
VCE(sat) 1.0 V
SW TR
6.2 K ALM24_
MR-MT2200
etc.
etc.
5 V DC 10%
10 m or less
2) For 24 V
Digital input
470
2.2 K
ALM05_
DICOM05_
For transistor Approx. 5 mA
VCE(sat) 1.0 V
SW TR
6.2 K ALM24_
MR-MT2200
etc.
etc.
24 V DC 10%
10 m or less
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 14
(b) Source input interface
Transmit signals from source (open-collector) type transistor outputs, relay switches, etc.
1) For 5 V
Digital input
470
2.2 K
ALM05_
DICOM05_
For transistor Approx. 5 mA
VCE(sat) 1.0 V
SW TR
6.2 K ALM24_
MR-MT2200
etc.
etc.
5 V DC 10%
10 m or less
2) For 24 V
Digital input
470
2.2 K
ALM05_
DICOM05_
For transistor Approx. 5 mA
VCE(sat) 1.0 V
SW TR
6.2 K ALM24_
MR-MT2200
etc.
etc.
24 V DC 10%
10 m or less
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 15
(3) Digital (24 V) input interface DI-3
(a) Sink input interface Transmit signals from sink (open-collector) type transistor output, relay switch, etc.
Digital input
6.2 K RD_
DICOM_ 24 V DC 10%
For transistor Approx. 5 mA
VCE(sat) 1.0 V
SW TR
MR-MT2200
2.2 K etc.
10 m or less
(b) Source input interface Transmit signals from source (open-collector) type transistor outputs, relay switches, etc.
Digital input
6.2 K RD_
DICOM_ 24 V DC 10%
For transistor Approx. 5 mA
VCE(sat) 1.0 V
SW TR
MR-MT2200
2.2 K etc.
10 m or less
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 16
(4) Digital (24 V) output interface DO-1
(a) Sink output interface When the output transistor is turned on, the current will flow to the collector terminal. Lamps, relays, or photocouplers can be driven. Install a diode (D) for an inductive load, or install an inrush current suppressing resistor (R) for a lamp load. (Rated current: 40 mA or less, maximum current: 50 mA or less, inrush current: 100 mA or less) A maximum of 2.6 V voltage drop occurs in MR-MT2200.
1) Inductive load
MR-MT2200 Inductive load
If polarity of diode is reversed, the pulse I/O module will malfunction.
24 V (Note)
DOCOM_
RES_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 50 mA
100 mA (peak)
Digital output signal etc.
10 m or less
2) Photocoupler
MR-MT2200
DOCOM_
RES_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 50 mA
100 mA (peak)
Digital output signal
24 V (Note)
R
etc.
10 m or less
3) Lamp load
MR-MT2200
DOCOM_
RES_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 50 mA
100 mA (peak)
Digital output signal
24 V (Note)
R
Lamp load
etc.
10 m or less
Note. If the voltage drop (maximum of 2.6 V) interferes with the relay operation, apply a high voltage (maximum of 26.4 V) from external
source.
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 17
(b) Source output interface
When the output transistor is turned on, the current will flow from the output terminal to a load. Lamps, relays, or photocouplers can be driven. Install a diode (D) for an inductive load, or install an inrush current suppressing resistor (R) for a lamp load. (Rated current: 40 mA or less, maximum current: 50 mA or less, inrush current: 100 mA or less) A maximum of 2.6 V voltage drop occurs in MR-MT2200.
1) Inductive load
MR-MT2200
DOCOM_
RES_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 50 mA
100 mA (peak)
Digital output signal
Inductive load
If polarity of diode is reversed, the pulse I/O module will malfunction.
etc. 24 V (Note)
10 m or less
2) Photocoupler
MR-MT2200
24 V (Note)
DOCOM_
RES_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 50 mA
100 mA (peak)
Digital output signal
PhotocouplerR
etc.
10 m or less
3) Lamp load
MR-MT2200
DOCOM_
RES_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 50 mA
100 mA (peak)
Digital output signal
Lamp loadR
24 V (Note)
etc.
10 m or less
Note. If the voltage drop (maximum of 2.6 V) interferes with the relay operation, apply a high voltage (maximum of 26.4 V) from
external source.
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 18
(5) Output interface DO-2
(a) Command pulse (open-collector) output interface
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 50 mA
100 mA (peak)
CW_
MR-MT2200
24 V
CW signal
CWG_
2 m or less
(Note)
24 V
CCW signal
CCW_
CCWG_
General-pulse train driver
Check the specifications of the general-purpose pulse train driver to be connected.
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 50 mA
100 mA (peak)
MR-MT2200
Note. Connect the cable shield directly to FG.
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 19
(b) High-speed output (DO4_/DO_5) interface
Digital output signal DO4_
Digital output signal DO5_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 50 mA
100 mA (peak)
DO4_
MR-MT2200
24 V
DO4G_
2 m or less
(Note)
24 V
DO5_
DO5G_
VCE(sat) 1.0 V Icmax 50 mA
100 mA (peak)
MR-MT2200
Note. Connect the cable shield directly to FG.
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 20
(6) Command pulse (differential) output interface DO-3
MR-MT2200
150 []
CW signal
150 []
AM26LS32 or equivalent
AM26LS31 or equivalent
10 m or less
CCW signal
(Note)
CWP_
CCWP_
CCWN_
CWN_
LG
150 []
150 []
Check the specifications of the general-purpose pulse train driver to be connected.
General-purpose pulse train driver
Note. Connect the cable shield directly to FG.
The following shows the minimum pulse width of command pulse (differential) output.
150 ns or more
A-phase (CW)
B-phase (CCW)
(When a differential line driver is used and the cable length is 1 m or less)
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 21
6.7.4 Command pulse output form
The following three different types of output pulse commands are available.
Connection form Signal name Forward/reverse rotation
pulse train Signed pulse train
A-phase/B-phase pulse train
Differential line driver connection
CWP, CWN CW (forward rotation pulse train)
PULSE (pulse train) A (A-phase) Open-collector connection CW, CWG
Differential line driver connection
CCWP, CCWN CCW (reverse rotation pulse train)
SIGN (sign) B (B-phase) Open-collector connection CCW, CCWG
Normally, the driver of the stepping motor, etc. has restrictions on the timing (interval time) of command pulse for switching the motor rotation direction. Considering the restrictions of the driver, set the dwell time (time when pulse is not outputted) to the controller for switching the motor rotation direction. An output change equivalent to when the command pulses are outputted may occur at the following timing of the pulse I/O module. (e.g. at initial setting of polarity and setting of output polarity)
When the pulse I/O module is on
When the pulse I/O module is off
At the first connection to SSCNET III/H communications
At the reconnection to SSCNET III/H communications (1) In station mode
Select the output functions with [Pr. PTC004] for A-axis and [Pr. PTC020] for B-axis.
Output pulse command form selection 0: Forward/reverse rotation pulse train 1: Signed pulse train 2: A-phase/B-phase pulse train
[Pr. PTC004]/[Pr. PTC020]
Output pulse logic selection 0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic
(2) In axis mode Select the output functions with [Pr. PB14].
Command pulse output form 0: Forward/reverse rotation pulse train 1: Signed pulse train 2: A-phase/B-phase pulse train
[Pr. PB14]
0 0
Pulse train logic selection 0: Positive logic 1: Negative logic
6. MR-MT2200 PULSE I/O MODULE
6 - 22
6.7.5 Input pulse form
The following three different types of input pulses are available.
Connection form Signal name Forward/reverse rotation
pulse train Signed pulse train
A-phase/B-phase pulse train
Differential line driver connection
FAP, FAN CW (forward rotation
pulse train) PULSE (pulse train) A (A-phase)
FBP, FBN CCW (reverse rotation
pulse train) SIGN (sign) B (B-phase)
(1) In station mode
Select the input functions with [Pr. PTC002] for A-axis and [Pr. PTC018] for B-axis.
Input pulse command form selection 0: Forward/reverse rotation pulse train 1: Signed pulse train 2: A-phase/B-phase pulse train
[Pr. PTC002]/[Pr. PTC018]
0 0
Input pulse logic selection 0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic
(2) In axis mode Select the input functions with [Pr. PB17].
Pulse train logic selection 0: Positive logic 1: Negative logic
[Pr. PB17]
0
Pulse train input form 0: Forward/reverse rotation pulse train 1: Signed pulse train 2: A-phase/B-phase pulse train
7. MR-MT2300 ANALOG I/O MODULE
7 - 1
7. MR-MT2300 ANALOG I/O MODULE
7.1 Summary
The MR-MT2300 analog I/O module allows analog input/output at resolution of 16 bits. 7.2 Standard specifications
Item MR-MT2300 analog I/O module
Control circuit power supply Supplied from the head module (24 V DC 10%, 0.1 A)
Analog input
Number of input channels 4
Input voltage range -10 V DC to +10 V DC/-5 V DC to +5 V DC
Resolution 10 V range: 0.334 mV 5 V range: 0.167 mV
Conversion accuracy 0.1% (25 C) / 0.3% (0 C to 60 C)
Conversion speed 20 s
Analog output
Number of output channels 4
Output voltage range -10 V DC to +10 V DC
Resolution 0.319 mV
Conversion accuracy 0.4% (25 C) / 0.5% (0 C to 60 C)
Conversion speed 40 s
Analog power supply
Voltage 24 V DC
Permissible voltage fluctuation 24 V DC 10%
Current capacity [A] 0.1
Compliance to global standards Refer to section 1.3.
Structure (IP rating) Refer to section 1.3.
Environment Refer to section 1.3.
Mass [kg] 0.2
7.3 Function list
The following lists the functions of the MR-MT2300 analog I/O module. For details and usage of the functions, refer to the manual for the controller.
Function Description
Analog input function This function sends analog data of analog input signals to the controller.
Analog output function This function outputs specified analog values from the controller.
Analog input averaging function This function averages the analog data of multiple analog input signals and sends it to the controller.
Maximum/minimum value holding function
This function sends analog data of analog input signals with the maximum and minimum values held.
7. MR-MT2300 ANALOG I/O MODULE
7 - 2
7.4 Parts identification
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(6) (7)
(5)
No. Name/application Detailed
explanation
(1) Status display LED (RUN) Indicates the operating status of the module. Section
7.5 (2)
Status display LED (ERR) Indicates that an error has occurred in the module.
(3) Analog input signal connector (CN1) Used to connect analog input signals.
Section 7.6
(4) Analog output signal connector (CN2) Connect the analog output signals.
(5) Analog signal power connector (CNP1) Connect the input power supply (24 V) for analog signals.
(6) Inter-module connection connector (CN3B) Connect with the head module or the preceding extension module.
(7) Inter-module connection connector (CN3A) Connect with the following extension module.
7. MR-MT2300 ANALOG I/O MODULE
7 - 3
7.5 Status display LEDs
The module status is displayed by the following two LEDs.
(1)
(2)
No. Display LED color Status Meaning
(1) RUN
Green On The module has been properly powered on.
Orange On Initializing
Off The module has not been properly powered on.
(2) ERR
Red Flickering A warning has occurred.
On An alarm has occurred.
Orange On Initializing
Off The module normally operates at power-on.
When the module is powered on When the module is powered on, both the RUN and ERR LEDs turn on in orange and then show the status above after the initialization of MR-MT2300.
When a watchdog error has occurred When a watchdog error has occurred, both the RUN and ERR LEDs turn on in red.
7. MR-MT2300 ANALOG I/O MODULE
7 - 4
7.6 Signals and wiring
POINT
The analog I/O module cannot execute A/D conversion or D/A conversion unless the analog power 24 V DC is supplied. Make sure to connect the analog power supply 24 V DC.
The analog output may be unstable at power-on or shut-off.
Turn on the analog power of the analog I/O module before turning on the control circuit power supply for the head module. Incorrect order of power-on generates [AL. 10.4].
7.6.1 Pin assignment
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
Pin assignment of CN1 (analog input)
No. Symbol Symbol No.
9 AIN2P AIN1P 1
10 AIN2N AIN1N 2
11 SHD SHD 3
12 AG AG 4
13 AIN4P AIN3P 5
14 AIN4N AIN3N 6
15 SHD SHD 7
16 AG AG 8
Pin assignment of CN2 (analog output)
No. Symbol Symbol No.
9 AOUT2P AOUT1P 1
10 AOUT2N AOUT1N 2
11 SHD SHD 3
12 AG AG 4
13 AOUT4P AOUT3P 5
14 AOUT4N AOUT3N 6
15 SHD SHD 7
16 AG AG 8
Pin assignment of CNP1 (analog power supply)
No. Symbol Symbol No.
5 24 V(+) 24 V(+) 1
6 24G 24G 2
7 3
8 FG FG 4
7. MR-MT2300 ANALOG I/O MODULE
7 - 5
7.6.2 Signal (device) explanations
(1) Input device
Device Symbol Connector
pin No. Function/application
I/O
division
Analog input ch. 1 AIN1P AIN1N
CN1-1 CN1-2
Input analog signals. Apply a voltage of -10 V DC to +10 V DC or -5 V DC to +5 V DC between AIN_P and AIN_N. Use [Pr. PTD001] to select an input voltage range (-10 V DC to +10 V DC or -5 V DC to +5 V DC).
Analog input
Analog input ch. 2 AIN2P AIN2N
CN1-9 CN1-10
Analog input ch. 3 AIN3P AIN3N
CN1-5 CN1-6
Analog input ch. 4 AIN4P AIN4N
CN1-13 CN1-14
(2) Output device
Device Symbol Connector
pin No. Function/application
I/O
division
Analog output ch. 1 AOUT1P AOUT1N
CN2-1 CN2-2
Outputs analog signals. A voltage is outputted between AOUT_P and AOUT_N. Output voltage: 10 V
Analog output
Analog output ch. 2 AOUT2P AOUT2N
CN2-9 CN2-10
Analog output ch. 3 AOUT3P AOUT3N
CN2-5 CN2-6
Analog output ch. 4 AOUT4P AOUT4N
CN2-13 CN2-14
(3) Power supply
Signal name Symbol Connector
pin No. Function/application
Analog power supply input
24 V(+) CNP1-1 CNP1-5
Analog power supply terminals. Input the 24 V DC (24 V DC 10%). Connect + of the 24 V DC external power supply.
24G CNP1-2 CNP1-6
Analog power supply terminals. Connect - of the 24 V DC external power supply.
Grounding FG CNP1-4 CNP1-8
Grounding terminals. Use them for grounding.
7. MR-MT2300 ANALOG I/O MODULE
7 - 6
7.6.3 Description of interfaces
This section provides the details of the I/O signal interfaces (refer to the I/O division in the table) given in section 7.6.2. Refer to this section and make connection with the external device. (1) Analog input
POINT
If the circuit between terminals of unused channels remains open, an unstable voltage value will be inputted. Short-circuit the input terminals "AIN_P" and "AIN_N" of unused channels to prevent this problem.
AIN_P
MR-MT2300
500 k (Note 4)
500 k (Note 4)
AG
AG
SHD
AIN_N
CNP1
FG
AG
CN1
(Note 1)
10 m or less
(Note 2)
Shield (Note 3)
Signal source -10 V to +10 V or -5 V to +5 V
Note 1. Use a two-core twisted cable for wiring.
2. When there is a potential difference between the AG terminal and the GND of an external device, connect the AG
terminal and the GND of the external device.
3. Be sure to connect the shielded wire of each channel to the SHD terminal and ground the FG terminal.
4. This value is the input resistance of analog input.
7. MR-MT2300 ANALOG I/O MODULE
7 - 7
(2) Analog output
MR-MT2300
AOUT_P
AG
SHD
AOUT_N
CNP1
FG
AG
CN2
(Note 1) (Note 5)
(Note 2)Shield (Note 3) GND(Note 4)
(Note 2)
External device
10 m or less
Note 1. Use a two-core twisted cable for wiring.
2. When there is a potential difference between the AG terminal and the GND of an external device, connect the AG
terminal and the GND of the external device.
3. Be sure to connect the shielded wire of each channel to the SHD terminal and ground the FG terminal.
4. The AG terminal and the AOUT_N terminal of each channel are connected inside the module.
5. The load resistance of external device must be 1 k or higher.
7. MR-MT2300 ANALOG I/O MODULE
7 - 8
MEMO
8. MR-MT2400 ENCODER I/F MODULE
8 - 1
8. MR-MT2400 ENCODER I/F MODULE
8.1 Summary
The MR-MT2400 encoder I/F module sends position data received from an encoder to the servo system controller through SSCNET III/H communications. The servo system controller performs the position management and fully closed loop control by using the position data obtained through SSCNET III/H communications. 8.2 Standard specifications
Item MR-MT2400 encoder I/F module
Control circuit power supply Supplied from the head module (24 V DC 10%, 0.2 A)
Number of encoder channels 2
Supported encoder communication SSI
Transmission speed: 100 kbps/200 kbps
Compliance to global standards Refer to section 1.3.
Structure (IP rating) Refer to section 1.3.
Environment Refer to section 1.3.
Mass [kg] 0.2
8.3 Function list
The following table lists the functions of the MR-MT2400 encoder I/F module. For details and usage of the functions, refer to the manual for the controller.
Function Description
Encoder input function This function sends position data received from the encoder to the controller. This function supports the open-standard encoder interface.
8. MR-MT2400 ENCODER I/F MODULE
8 - 2
8.4 Parts identification
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(5) (6)
No. Name/application Detailed
explanation
(1) Status display LED (CH.A) Indicates the status of ch. A. Section
8.5 (2)
Status display LED (CH.B) Indicates the status of ch. B.
(3) Encoder signal input connector (CN1) Input SSI signals.
Section 8.6
(4) Encoder signal input connector (CN2)
(5) Inter-module connection connector (CN3B) Connect with the head module or the preceding extension module.
(6) Inter-module connection connector (CN3A) Connect with the following extension module.
8.5 Status display LEDs
The module status is displayed by the following two LEDs.
(1)
(2)
No. Display LED color Status Meaning
(1) CH.A
Green On The module has been properly powered on and is waiting for Ch. A operation to be enabled.
Red Flickering A warning has occurred in Ch. A.
On An alarm has occurred in Ch. A.
Orange On Initializing
Off The module has not been properly powered on.
(2) CH.B
Green On The module has been properly powered on and is waiting for Ch. B operation to be enabled.
Red Flickering A warning has occurred in Ch. B.
On An alarm has occurred in Ch. B.
Orange On Initializing
Off The module has not been properly powered on.
When the module is powered on When the module is powered on, both the CH.A and CH.B LEDs turn on in orange and then show the status above when the communications with the head module are established and the runtime is started.
When a watchdog error has occurred When a watchdog error has occurred, both the CH.A and CH.B LEDs turn on in red.
8. MR-MT2400 ENCODER I/F MODULE
8 - 3
8.6 Signals and wiring
8.6.1 Pin assignment
12
11
10
18
17
16
15
14
13
9
8
22
21
20
19
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
12
11
10
18
17
16
15
14
13
9
8
22
21
20
19
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Pin assignment of CN1
No. Symbol Symbol No.
12 1
13 2
14 P5 LG 3
15 CLK+_A DATA+_A 4
16 CLK-_A DATA-_A 5
17 SHD SHD 6
18 7
19 8
20 P5 LG 9
21 CLK+_B DATA+_B 10
22 CLK-_B DATA-_B 11
Pin assignment of CN2
No. Symbol Symbol No.
12 1
13 2
14 SHD SHD 3
15 4
16 5
17 6
18 7
19 8
20 9
21 10
22 11
8. MR-MT2400 ENCODER I/F MODULE
8 - 4
8.6.2 Connecting SSI-compatible encoders
(1) 5 V power supply specifications
Encoder
DATA+_A
P5
SHD
SHD
DATA-_A
4
14
CLK+_A 15
CLK-_A 16
6
3
5
LG 3
30 m or lessMR-MT2400
CN1
CN2
(2) 24 V power supply specifications
Encoder
DATA+_A
P5
SHD
DATA-_A
4
14
CLK+_A 15
CLK-_A 16
6
5
LG 3
30 m or lessMR-MT2400
24 V power supply (Note)
CN1
SHD 3
CN2
Note. Supply the power to the encoder externally if the power supplied to the encoder is
other than 5 V.
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 1
9. PARAMETERS
CAUTION
Never make a drastic adjustment or change to the parameter values as doing so will make the operation unstable.
Do not change the parameter settings as described below. Doing so may cause an unexpected condition such as failing to start up the sensing module.
Changing the values of the parameters for manufacturer setting
Setting a value outside the range
Changing the fixed values in the digits of a parameter
When writing parameters from the controller, check that the station number or axis number of the sensing module is set correctly. If the set station number or axis number is incorrect, the parameter setting values of a different station or axis will be written, leading to unexpected operations of the sensing module.
POINT
When you connect the sensing module to a servo system controller, parameter values of the servo system controller will be written to each parameter.
Setting may not be made to some parameters and their ranges depending on the servo system controller model, sensing module, and MELSOFT MT Works2 software version. For details, refer to the servo system controller user's manual. Check the software version of the sensing module using MELSOFT MT Works2.
9.1 Station mode
9.1.1 Parameter list
POINT
The parameter whose symbol is preceded by * is enabled with the following conditions: *: After setting the parameter, cycle the power or reset the controller. **: After setting the parameter, cycle the power.
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 2
(1) MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H head module
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTA001 *HDI11 DI1 (CN2-13) setting 1 0000h PTA002 *HDI12 DI1 (CN2-13) setting 2 0000h PTA003 *HDI21 DI2 (CN2-1) setting 1 0000h
PTA004 *HDI22 DI2 (CN2-1) setting 2 0000h
PTA005 *HDI31 DI3 (CN2-14) setting 1 0000h
PTA006 *HDI32 DI3 (CN2-14) setting 2 0000h
PTA007 *HDI41 DI4 (CN2-2) setting 1 0000h
PTA008 *HDI42 DI4 (CN2-2) setting 2 0000h
PTA009 *HDI51 DI5 (CN2-15) setting 1 0000h
PTA010 *HDI52 DI5 (CN2-15) setting 2 0000h
PTA011 *HDI61 DI6 (CN2-3) setting 1 0000h
PTA012 *HDI62 DI6 (CN2-3) setting 2 0000h
PTA013 *HDI71 DI7 (CN2-16) setting 1 0000h
PTA014 *HDI72 DI7 (CN2-16) setting 2 0000h
PTA015 *HDI81 DI8 (CN2-4) setting 1 0000h
PTA016 *HDI82 DI8 (CN2-4) setting 2 0000h
PTA017 *HDI91 DI9 (CN2-17) setting 1 0000h
PTA018 *HDI92 DI9 (CN2-17) setting 2 0000h
PTA019 *HDIA1 DI10 (CN2-5) setting 1 0000h
PTA020 *HDIA2 DI10 (CN2-5) setting 2 0000h
PTA021 *HDIB1 DI11 (CN2-18) setting 1 0000h
PTA022 *HDIB2 DI11 (CN2-18) setting 2 0000h
PTA023 *HDIC1 DI12 (CN2-6) setting 1 0000h
PTA024 *HDIC2 DI12 (CN2-6) setting 2 0000h
PTA025
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTA026 0003h
PTA027 *HDO11 DO1 (CN2-20) setting 1 0000h
PTA028 *HDO12 DO1 (CN2-20) setting 2 0000h
PTA029 *HDO21 DO2 (CN2-8) setting 1 0000h
PTA030 *HDO22 DO2 (CN2-8) setting 2 0000h
PTA031 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTA032 *AOP1 Function selection A-1 0000h
PTA033 *LO1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Detailed setting 1 0000h PTA034 LONL1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Lower limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTA035 LONH1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Lower limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTA036 LOFL1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Upper limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTA037 LOFH1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Upper limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTA038 *LO2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Detailed setting 1 0000h
PTA039 LONL2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Lower limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTA040 LONH2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Lower limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTA041 LOFL2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Upper limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTA042 LOFH2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Upper limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTA043
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTA044 0000h
PTA045 0000h
PTA046 0000h
PTA047 0000h
PTA048 0000h
PTA049 0000h
PTA050 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 3
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTA051
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTA052 0000h
PTA053 0000h
PTA054 0000h
PTA055 0000h
PTA056 0000h
PTA057 0000h
PTA058 0000h
PTA059 0000h
PTA060 0000h
PTA061 0000h
PTA062 0000h
PTA063 0000h
PTA064 0000h
PTA065 0000h
PTA066 0000h
PTA067 0000h
PTA068 0000h
PTA069 0000h
PTA070 0000h
PTA071 0000h
PTA072 0000h
PTA073 0000h
PTA074 0000h
PTA075 0000h
PTA076 0000h
PTA077 0000h
PTA078 0000h
PTA079 0000h
PTA080 0000h
PTA081 0000h
PTA082 0000h
PTA083 0000h
PTA084 0000h
PTA085 0000h
PTA086 0000h
PTA087 0000h
PTA088 0000h
PTA089 0000h
PTA090 0000h
PTA091 0000h
PTA092 0000h
PTA093 0000h
PTA094 0000h
PTA095 0000h
PTA096 0000h
PTA097 0000h
PTA098 0000h
PTA099 0000h
PTA100 0000h
PTA101 0000h
PTA102 0000h
PTA103 0000h
PTA104 0000h
PTA105 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 4
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTA106
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTA107 0000h
PTA108 0000h
PTA109 0000h
PTA110 0000h
PTA111 0000h
PTA112 0000h
PTA113 0000h
PTA114 0000h
PTA115 0000h
PTA116 0000h
PTA117 0000h
PTA118 0000h
PTA119 0000h
PTA120 0000h
PTA121 0000h
PTA122 0000h
PTA123 0000h
PTA124 0000h
PTA125 0000h
PTA126 0000h
PTA127 0000h
PTA128 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 5
(2) MR-MT2100 I/O module
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTB001 *IDI11 DI1 (CN1-10) setting 1 0000h PTB002 *IDI12 DI1 (CN1-10) setting 2 0000h
PTB003 *IDI21 DI2 (CN1-1) setting 1 0000h
PTB004 *IDI22 DI2 (CN1-1) setting 2 0000h
PTB005 *IDI31 DI3 (CN1-11) setting 1 0000h
PTB006 *IDI32 DI3 (CN1-11) setting 2 0000h
PTB007 *IDI41 DI4 (CN1-2) setting 1 0000h
PTB008 *IDI42 DI4 (CN1-2) setting 2 0000h
PTB009 *IDI51 DI5 (CN1-12) setting 1 0000h
PTB010 *IDI52 DI5 (CN1-12) setting 2 0000h
PTB011 *IDI61 DI6 (CN1-3) setting 1 0000h
PTB012 *IDI62 DI6 (CN1-3) setting 2 0000h
PTB013 *IDI71 DI7 (CN1-13) setting 1 0000h
PTB014 *IDI72 DI7 (CN1-13) setting 2 0000h
PTB015 *IDI81 DI8 (CN1-4) setting 1 0000h
PTB016 *IDI82 DI8 (CN1-4) setting 2 0000h
PTB017 *IDI91 DI9 (CN1-14) setting 1 0000h
PTB018 *IDI92 DI9 (CN1-14) setting 2 0000h
PTB019 *IDIA1 DI10 (CN1-5) setting 1 0000h
PTB020 *IDIA2 DI10 (CN1-5) setting 2 0000h
PTB021 *IDIB1 DI11 (CN1-15) setting 1 0000h
PTB022 *IDIB2 DI11 (CN1-15) setting 2 0000h
PTB023 *IDIC1 DI12 (CN1-6) setting 1 0000h
PTB024 *IDIC2 DI12 (CN1-6) setting 2 0000h
PTB025 *IDID1 DI13 (CN1-16) setting 1 0000h
PTB026 *IDID2 DI13 (CN1-16) setting 2 0000h
PTB027 *IDIE1 DI14 (CN1-7) setting 1 0000h
PTB028 *IDIE2 DI14 (CN1-7) setting 2 0000h
PTB029 *IDIF1 DI15 (CN1-17) setting 1 0000h
PTB030 *IDIF2 DI15 (CN1-17) setting 2 0000h
PTB031 *IDIG1 DI16 (CN1-8) setting 1 0000h
PTB032 *IDIG2 DI16 (CN1-8) setting 2 0000h
PTB033
For manufacturer setting 0000h PTB034 0003h
PTB035 0000h
PTB036 0000h
PTB037 *IDO11 DO1 (CN2-11) setting 1 0000h
PTB038 *IDO12 DO1 (CN2-11) setting 2 0000h
PTB039 *IDO21 DO2 (CN2-1) setting 1 0000h
PTB040 *IDO22 DO2 (CN2-1) setting 2 0000h
PTB041 *IDO31 DO3 (CN2-12) setting 1 0000h
PTB042 *IDO32 DO3 (CN2-12) setting 2 0000h
PTB043 *IDO41 DO4 (CN2-2) setting 1 0000h
PTB044 *IDO42 DO4 (CN2-2) setting 2 0000h
PTB045 *IDO51 DO5 (CN2-13) setting 1 0000h
PTB046 *IDO52 DO5 (CN2-13) setting 2 0000h
PTB047 *IDO61 DO6 (CN2-3) setting 1 0000h
PTB048 *IDO62 DO6 (CN2-3) setting 2 0000h
PTB049 *IDO71 DO7 (CN2-14) setting 1 0000h
PTB050 *IDO72 DO7 (CN2-14) setting 2 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 6
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTB051 *IDO81 DO8 (CN2-4) setting 1 0000h
PTB052 *IDO82 DO8 (CN2-4) setting 2 0000h
PTB053 *IDO91 DO9 (CN2-15) setting 1 0000h
PTB054 *IDO92 DO9 (CN2-15) setting 2 0000h
PTB055 *IDOA1 DO10 (CN2-5) setting 1 0000h
PTB056 *IDOA2 DO10 (CN2-5) setting 2 0000h
PTB057 *IDOB1 DO11 (CN2-16) setting 1 0000h
PTB058 *IDOB2 DO11 (CN2-16) setting 2 0000h
PTB059 *IDOC1 DO12 (CN2-6) setting 1 0000h
PTB060 *IDOC2 DO12 (CN2-6) setting 2 0000h
PTB061 *IDOD1 DO13 (CN2-17) setting 1 0000h
PTB062 *IDOD2 DO13 (CN2-17) setting 2 0000h
PTB063 *IDOE1 DO14 (CN2-7) setting 1 0000h
PTB064 *IDOE2 DO14 (CN2-7) setting 2 0000h
PTB065 *IDOF1 DO15 (CN2-18) setting 1 0000h PTB066 *IDOF2 DO15 (CN2-18) setting 2 0000h
PTB067 *IDOG1 DO16 (CN2-8) setting 1 0000h
PTB068 *IDOG2 DO16 (CN2-8) setting 2 0000h
PTB069 *IDO Digital output connection setting 0000h
PTB070
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTB071 0000h
PTB072 0000h
PTB073 *ILO1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Detailed setting 1 0000h
PTB074 ILONL1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Lower limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB075 ILONH1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Lower limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTB076 ILOFL1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Upper limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB077 ILOFH1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Upper limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTB078 *ILO2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Detailed setting 1 0000h
PTB079 ILONL2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Lower limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB080 ILONH2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Lower limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTB081 ILOFL2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Upper limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB082 ILOFH2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Upper limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTB083 *ILO3 Level output function - Setting group 3 - Detailed setting 1 0000h
PTB084 ILONL3 Level output function - Setting group 3 - Lower limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB085 ILONH3 Level output function - Setting group 3 - Lower limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTB086 ILOFL3 Level output function - Setting group 3 - Upper limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB087 ILOFH3 Level output function - Setting group 3 - Upper limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTB088 *ILO4 Level output function - Setting group 4 - Detailed setting 1 0000h
PTB089 ILONL4 Level output function - Setting group 4 - Lower limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB090 ILONH4 Level output function - Setting group 4 - Lower limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTB091 ILOFL4 Level output function - Setting group 4 - Upper limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB092 ILOFH4 Level output function - Setting group 4 - Upper limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTB093 *ILO5 Level output function - Setting group 5 - Detailed setting 1 0000h
PTB094 ILONL5 Level output function - Setting group 5 - Lower limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB095 ILONH5 Level output function - Setting group 5 - Lower limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTB096 ILOFL5 Level output function - Setting group 5 - Upper limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB097 ILOFH5 Level output function - Setting group 5 - Upper limit setting - Upper 0000h PTB098 *ILO6 Level output function - Setting group 6 - Detailed setting 1 0000h
PTB099 ILONL6 Level output function - Setting group 6 - Lower limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB100 ILONH6 Level output function - Setting group 6 - Lower limit setting - Upper 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 7
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTB101 ILOFL6 Level output function - Setting group 6 - Upper limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB102 ILOFH6 Level output function - Setting group 6 - Upper limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTB103 *ILO7 Level output function - Setting group 7 - Detailed setting 1 0000h
PTB104 ILONL7 Level output function - Setting group 7 - Lower limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB105 ILONH7 Level output function - Setting group 7 - Lower limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTB106 ILOFL7 Level output function - Setting group 7 - Upper limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB107 ILOFH7 Level output function - Setting group 7 - Upper limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTB108 *ILO8 Level output function - Setting group 8 - Detailed setting 1 0000h
PTB109 ILONL8 Level output function - Setting group 8 - Lower limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB110 ILONH8 Level output function - Setting group 8 - Lower limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTB111 ILOFL8 Level output function - Setting group 8 - Upper limit setting - Lower 0000h
PTB112 ILOFH8 Level output function - Setting group 8 - Upper limit setting - Upper 0000h
PTB113
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTB114 0000h
PTB115 0000h
PTB116 0000h
PTB117 0000h
PTB118 0000h
PTB119 0000h
PTB120 0000h
PTB121 0000h
PTB122 0000h
PTB123 0000h
PTB124 0000h
PTB125 0000h
PTB126 0000h
PTB127 0000h
PTB128 0000h
PTB129 0000h
PTB130 0000h
PTB131 0000h
PTB132 0000h
PTB133 0000h
PTB134 0000h
PTB135 0000h
PTB136 0000h
PTB137 0000h
PTB138 0000h
PTB139 0000h
PTB140 0000h
PTB141 0000h
PTB142 0000h
PTB143 0000h
PTB144 0000h
PTB145 0000h
PTB146 0000h
PTB147 0000h
PTB148 0000h
PTB149 0000h
PTB150 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 8
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTB151
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTB152 0000h
PTB153 0000h
PTB154 0000h
PTB155 0000h
PTB156 0000h
PTB157 0000h
PTB158 0000h
PTB159 0000h
PTB160 0000h
PTB161 0000h
PTB162 0000h
PTB163 0000h
PTB164 0000h
PTB165 0000h
PTB166 0000h
PTB167 0000h
PTB168 0000h
PTB169 0000h
PTB170 0000h
PTB171 0000h
PTB172 0000h
PTB173 0000h
PTB174 0000h
PTB175 0000h
PTB176 0000h
PTB177 0000h
PTB178 0000h
PTB179 0000h
PTB180 0000h
PTB181 0000h
PTB182 0000h
PTB183 0000h
PTB184 0000h
PTB185 0000h
PTB186 0000h
PTB187 0000h
PTB188 0000h
PTB189 0000h
PTB190 0000h
PTB191 0000h
PTB192 0000h
PTB193 0000h
PTB194 0000h
PTB195 0000h
PTB196 0000h
PTB197 0000h
PTB198 0000h
PTB199 0000h
PTB200 0000h
PTB201 0000h
PTB202 0000h
PTB203 0000h
PTB204 0000h
PTB205 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 9
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTB206
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTB207 0000h
PTB208 0000h
PTB209 0000h
PTB210 0000h
PTB211 0000h
PTB212 0000h
PTB213 0000h
PTB214 0000h
PTB215 0000h
PTB216 0000h
PTB217 0000h
PTB218 0000h
PTB219 0000h
PTB220 0000h
PTB221 0000h
PTB222 0000h
PTB223 0000h
PTB224 0000h
PTB225 0000h
PTB226 0000h
PTB227 0000h
PTB228 0000h
PTB229 0000h
PTB230 0000h
PTB231 0000h
PTB232 0000h
PTB233 0000h
PTB234 0000h
PTB235 0000h
PTB236 0000h
PTB237 0000h
PTB238 0000h
PTB239 0000h
PTB240 0000h
PTB241 0000h
PTB242 0000h
PTB243 0000h
PTB244 0000h
PTB245 0000h
PTB246 0000h
PTB247 0000h
PTB248 0000h
PTB249 0000h
PTB250 0000h
PTB251 0000h
PTB252 0000h
PTB253 0000h
PTB254 0000h
PTB255 0000h
PTB256 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 10
(3) MR-MT2200 pulse I/O module
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTC001 *PFSA A-axis setting 0000h PTC002 *PIFA1 A-axis input function setting 1 0000h
PTC003 *PIFA2 A-axis input function setting 2 0000h
PTC004 *POFA1 A-axis output function selection 1 0000h
PTC005 *POFA2 A-axis output function selection 2 0000h
PTC006 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC007 *CMXA A-axis input-side electronic gear setting 0000h
PTC008 *CDVA A-axis output-side electronic gear setting 0000h
PTC009
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC010 0000h
PTC011 0000h
PTC012 0000h
PTC013 0000h
PTC014 0000h
PTC015 0000h
PTC016 0000h
PTC017 *PFSB B-axis setting 0000h
PTC018 *PIFB1 B-axis input function setting 1 0000h
PTC019 *PIFB2 B-axis input function setting 2 0000h
PTC020 *POFB1 B-axis output function selection 1 0000h
PTC021 *POFB2 B-axis output function selection 2 0000h
PTC022 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC023 *CMXB B-axis input-side electronic gear setting 0000h
PTC024 *CDVB B-axis input-side electronic gear setting 0000h
PTC025
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC026 0000h
PTC027 0000h
PTC028 0000h
PTC029 0000h
PTC030 0000h
PTC031 0000h
PTC032 0000h
PTC033 *IDI1A1 DI1A (CN1-8) setting 1 0000h PTC034 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC035 *IDI2A1 DI2A (CN1-10) setting 1 0000h
PTC036 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC037 *IDI3A1 DI3A (CN1-7) setting 1 0000h
PTC038 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC039 *IDI4A1 DI4A (CN1-9) setting 1 0000h
PTC040 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC041 *IDI5A1 DI5A (CN1-19) setting 1 0000h
PTC042 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC043 *IDI6A1 DI6A (CN1-20) setting 1 0000h
PTC044 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC045 *IDI7A1 DI7A (CN1-21) setting 1 0000h
PTC046 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC047 *IDI1B1 DI1B (CN2-8) setting 1 0000h
PTC048 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC049 *IDI2B1 DI2B (CN2-10) setting 1 0000h
PTC050 For manufacturer setting 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 11
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTC051 *IDI3B1 DI3B (CN2-7) setting 1 0000h
PTC052 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC053 *IDI4B1 DI4B (CN2-9) setting 1 0000h
PTC054 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC055 *IDI5B1 DI5B (CN2-19) setting 1 0000h
PTC056 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC057 *IDI6B1 DI6B (CN2-20) setting 1 0000h
PTC058 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC059 *IDI7B1 DI7B (CN2-21) setting 1 0000h
PTC060 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC061 0000h
PTC062 0003h
PTC063 0000h
PTC064 0000h
PTC065 *IDO1A1 DO1A (CN1-11) setting 1 0000h PTC066 *IDO1A2 DO1A (CN1-11) setting 2 0000h
PTC067 *IDO2A1 DO2A (CN1-12) setting 1 0000h
PTC068 *IDO2A2 DO2A (CN1-12) setting 2 0000h
PTC069 *IDO3A1 DO3A (CN1-23) setting 1 0000h
PTC070 *IDO3A2 DO3A (CN1-23) setting 2 0000h
PTC071 *IDO4A1 DO4A (CN1-1) setting 1 0000h
PTC072 *IDO4A2 DO4A (CN1-1) setting 2 0000h
PTC073 *IDO5A1 DO5A (CN1-13) setting 1 0000h
PTC074 *IDO5A2 DO5A (CN1-13) setting 2 0000h
PTC075 *IDO1B1 DO1B (CN2-11) setting 1 0000h
PTC076 *IDO1B2 DO1B (CN2-11) setting 2 0000h
PTC077 *IDO2B1 DO2B (CN2-12) setting 1 0000h
PTC078 *IDO2B2 DO2B (CN2-12) setting 2 0000h
PTC079 *IDO3B1 DO3B (CN2-23) setting 1 0000h
PTC080 *IDO3B2 DO3B (CN2-23) setting 2 0000h
PTC081 *IDO4B1 DO4B (CN2-1) setting 1 0000h
PTC082 *IDO4B2 DO4B (CN2-1) setting 2 0000h
PTC083 *IDO5B1 DO5B (CN2-13) setting 1 0000h
PTC084 *IDO5B2 DO5B (CN2-13) setting 2 0000h
PTC085
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC086 0000h
PTC087 0000h
PTC088 0000h
PTC089 0000h
PTC090 0000h
PTC091 0000h
PTC092 0000h
PTC093 0000h
PTC094 0000h
PTC095 0000h
PTC096 0000h
PTC097 0000h
PTC098 0000h
PTC099 0000h
PTC100 0000h
PTC101 0000h
PTC102 0000h
PTC103 0000h
PTC104 0000h
PTC105 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 12
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTC106
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTC107 0000h
PTC108 0000h
PTC109 0000h
PTC110 0000h
PTC111 0000h
PTC112 0000h
PTC113 0000h
PTC114 0000h
PTC115 0000h
PTC116 0000h
PTC117 0000h
PTC118 0000h
PTC119 0000h
PTC120 0000h
PTC121 0000h
PTC122 0000h
PTC123 0000h
PTC124 0000h
PTC125 0000h
PTC126 0000h
PTC127 0000h
PTC128 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 13
(4) MR-MT2300 analog I/O module
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTD001 *AIF1 Analog input function selection 1 0000h PTD002 *AI1F2 Analog input ch. 1 - Function selection 2 0000h
PTD003 *AI1FT Analog input ch. 1 - Primary delay filter time constant 0 [ms]
PTD004 AI1OF Analog input ch. 1 - Offset voltage setting 0 [mV]
PTD005 *AI1SH Analog input ch. 1 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting 20000
PTD006 *AI1SL Analog input ch. 1 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting -20000
PTD007 *AI1SF Analog input ch. 1 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting 0
PTD008
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTD009 0000h
PTD010 *AI2F2 Analog input ch. 2 - Function selection 2 0000h
PTD011 *AI2FT Analog input ch. 2 - Primary delay filter time constant 0 [ms]
PTD012 AI2OF Analog input ch. 2 - Offset voltage setting 0 [mV]
PTD013 *AI2SH Analog input ch. 2 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting 20000
PTD014 *AI2SL Analog input ch. 2 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting -20000
PTD015 *AI2SF Analog input ch. 2 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting 0
PTD016
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTD017 0000h
PTD018 *AI3F2 Analog input ch. 3 - Function selection 2 0000h
PTD019 *AI3FT Analog input ch. 3 - Primary delay filter time constant 0 [ms]
PTD020 AI3OF Analog input ch. 3 - Offset voltage setting 0 [mV]
PTD021 *AI3SH Analog input ch. 3 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting 20000
PTD022 *AI3SL Analog input ch. 3 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting -20000
PTD023 *AI3SF Analog input ch. 3 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting 0
PTD024
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTD025 0000h
PTD026 *AI4F2 Analog input ch. 4 - Function selection 2 0000h
PTD027 *AI4FT Analog input ch. 4 - Primary delay filter time constant 0 [ms]
PTD028 AI4OF Analog input ch. 4 - Offset voltage setting 0 [mV]
PTD029 *AI4SH Analog input ch. 4 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting 20000
PTD030 *AI4SL Analog input ch. 4 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting -20000
PTD031 *AI4SF Analog input ch. 4 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting 0
PTD032
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTD033 0000h
PTD034 AO1OF Analog output ch. 1 - Offset 0 [mV]
PTD035 *AO1SH Analog output ch. 1 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting 20000
PTD036 *AO1SL Analog output ch. 1 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting -20000
PTD037 *AO1SF Analog output ch. 1 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting 0
PTD038
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTD039 0000h
PTD040 0000h
PTD041 0000h
PTD042 AO2OF Analog output ch. 2 - Offset 0 [mV]
PTD043 *AO2SH Analog output ch. 2 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting 20000
PTD044 *AO2SL Analog output ch. 2 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting -20000
PTD045 *AO2SF Analog output ch. 2 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting 0
PTD046
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTD047 0000h
PTD048 0000h
PTD049 0000h
PTD050 AO3OF Analog output ch. 3 - Offset 0 [mV]
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 14
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTD051 *AO3SH Analog output ch. 3 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting 20000
PTD052 *AO3SL Analog output ch. 3 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting -20000
PTD053 *AO3SF Analog output ch. 3 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting 0
PTD054
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTD055 0000h
PTD056 0000h
PTD057 0000h
PTD058 AO4OF Analog output ch. 4 - Offset 0 [mV]
PTD059 *AO4SH Analog output ch. 4 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting 20000
PTD060 *AO4SL Analog output ch. 4 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting -20000
PTD061 *AO4SF Analog output ch. 4 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting 0
PTD062
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTD063 0000h
PTD064 0000h
PTD065 *AIAVF Analog input averaging - Signal selection 0000h
PTD066 For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTD067 *AIAV1C1 Analog input average 1 - Ch. 1 weighting 1
PTD068 *AIAV1C2 Analog input average 1 - Ch. 2 weighting 1
PTD069 *AIAV1C3 Analog input average 1 - Ch. 3 weighting 1
PTD070 *AIAV1C4 Analog input average 1 - Ch. 4 weighting 1
PTD071 *AIAV2C1 Analog input average 2 - Ch. 1 weighting 1
PTD072 *AIAV2C2 Analog input average 2 - Ch. 2 weighting 1
PTD073 *AIAV2C3 Analog input average 2 - Ch. 3 weighting 1
PTD074 *AIAV2C4 Analog input average 2 - Ch. 4 weighting 1
PTD075
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTD076 0000h
PTD077 0000h
PTD078 0000h
PTD079 0000h
PTD080 0000h
PTD081 0000h
PTD082 0000h
PTD083 0000h
PTD084 0000h
PTD085 0000h
PTD086 0000h
PTD087 0000h
PTD088 0000h
PTD089 0000h
PTD090 0000h
PTD091 0000h
PTD092 0000h
PTD093 0000h
PTD094 0000h
PTD095 0000h
PTD096 0000h
PTD097 0000h
PTD098 0000h
PTD099 0000h
PTD100 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 15
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTD101
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTD102 0000h
PTD103 0000h
PTD104 0000h
PTD105 0000h
PTD106 0000h
PTD107 0000h
PTD108 0000h
PTD109 0000h
PTD110 0000h
PTD111 0000h
PTD112 0000h
PTD113 0000h
PTD114 0000h
PTD115 0000h
PTD116 0000h
PTD117 0000h
PTD118 0000h
PTD119 0000h
PTD120 0000h
PTD121 0000h
PTD122 0000h
PTD123 0000h
PTD124 0000h
PTD125 0000h
PTD126 0000h
PTD127 0000h
PTD128 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 16
(5) MR-MT2400 encoder I/F module
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTE001
For manufacturer setting 0003h
PTE002 0000h
PTE003 0000h
PTE004 0000h
PTE005 0000h
PTE006 0000h
PTE007 0000h
PTE008 0000h
PTE009 **ENCA Ch. A function selection 0000h
PTE010
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTE011 0000h
PTE012 0000h
PTE013 0000h
PTE014 0000h
PTE015 0000h
PTE016 0000h
PTE017 0000h
PTE018 0000h
PTE019 0000h
PTE020 0000h
PTE021 0000h
PTE022 0000h
PTE023 0000h
PTE024 0000h
PTE025 0000h
PTE026 0000h
PTE027 0000h
PTE028 0000h
PTE029 0000h
PTE030 0000h
PTE031 0000h
PTE032 0000h
PTE033 0000h
PTE034 0000h
PTE035 0000h
PTE036 0000h
PTE037 **SECA1 SSI - Ch. A function setting 1 2000h
PTE038 **SECA2 SSI - Ch. A function setting 2 0000h
PTE039 **SECA3 SSI - Ch. A function setting 3 0000h
PTE040 **SECA4 SSI - Ch. A function setting 4 0000h
PTE041 **SECA5 SSI - Ch. A function setting 5 0000h
PTE042 **SECA6 SSI - Ch. A function setting 6 0000h
PTE043 **SDPLA Ch. A position variation error threshold - Lower 0000h
PTE044 **SDPHA Ch. A position variation error threshold - Upper 0000h
PTE045
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTE046 0000h
PTE047 0000h
PTE048 0000h
PTE049 0000h
PTE050 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 17
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTE051
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTE052 0000h
PTE053 0000h
PTE054 0000h
PTE055 0000h
PTE056 0000h
PTE057 0000h
PTE058 0000h
PTE059 0000h
PTE060 0000h
PTE061 0000h
PTE062 0000h
PTE063 0000h
PTE064 0000h
PTE065 **ENCB Ch. B function selection 0000h
PTE066
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTE067 0000h
PTE068 0000h
PTE069 0000h
PTE070 0000h
PTE071 0000h
PTE072 0000h
PTE073 0000h
PTE074 0000h
PTE075 0000h
PTE076 0000h
PTE077 0000h
PTE078 0000h
PTE079 0000h
PTE080 0000h
PTE081 0000h
PTE082 0000h
PTE083 0000h
PTE084 0000h
PTE085 0000h
PTE086 0000h
PTE087 0000h
PTE088 0000h
PTE089 0000h
PTE090 0000h
PTE091 0000h
PTE092 0000h
PTE093 **SECB1 SSI - Ch. B function setting 1 2000h
PTE094 **SECB2 SSI - Ch. B function setting 2 0000h
PTE095 **SECB3 SSI - Ch. B function setting 3 0000h
PTE096 **SECB4 SSI - Ch. B function setting 4 0000h
PTE097 **SECB5 SSI - Ch. B function setting 5 0000h
PTE098 **SECB6 SSI - Ch. B function setting 6 0000h
PTE099 **SDPLB Ch. B position variation error threshold - Lower 0000h
PTE100 **SDPHB Ch. B position variation error threshold - Upper 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 18
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PTE101
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PTE102 0000h
PTE103 0000h
PTE104 0000h
PTE105 0000h
PTE106 0000h
PTE107 0000h
PTE108 0000h
PTE109 0000h
PTE110 0000h
PTE111 0000h
PTE112 0000h
PTE113 0000h
PTE114 0000h
PTE115 0000h
PTE116 0000h
PTE117 0000h
PTE118 0000h
PTE119 0000h
PTE120 0000h
PTE121 0000h
PTE122 0000h
PTE123 0000h
PTE124 0000h
PTE125 0000h
PTE126 0000h
PTE127 0000h
PTE128 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 19
9.1.2 Detailed list of parameters
POINT
Set a value to each "x" in the "Setting digit" columns.
(1) MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H head module
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTA001 *HDI11 DI1 (CN2-13) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI1 (CN2-13).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA002 *HDI12 DI1 (CN2-13) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI1 (CN2-13).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA003 *HDI21 DI2 (CN2-1) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI2 (CN2-1).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 20
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTA004 *HDI22 DI2 (CN2-1) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI2 (CN2-1).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA005 *HDI31 DI3 (CN2-14) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI3 (CN2-14).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA006 *HDI32 DI3 (CN2-14) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI3 (CN2-14).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA007 *HDI41 DI4 (CN2-2) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI4 (CN2-2).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 21
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTA008 *HDI42 DI4 (CN2-2) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI4 (CN2-2).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA009 *HDI51 DI5 (CN2-15) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI5 (CN2-15).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA010 *HDI52 DI5 (CN2-15) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI5 (CN2-15).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA011 *HDI61 DI6 (CN2-3) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI6 (CN2-3).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 22
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTA012 *HDI62 DI6 (CN2-3) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI6 (CN2-3).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA013 *HDI71 DI7 (CN2-16) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI7 (CN2-16).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA014 *HDI72 DI7 (CN2-16) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI7 (CN2-16).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA015 *HDI81 DI8 (CN2-4) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI8 (CN2-4).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 23
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTA016 *HDI82 DI8 (CN2-4) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI8 (CN2-4).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA017 *HDI91 DI9 (CN2-17) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI9 (CN2-17).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA018 *HDI92 DI9 (CN2-17) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI9 (CN2-17).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA019 *HDIA1 DI10 (CN2-5) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI10 (CN2-5).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 24
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTA020 *HDIA2 DI10 (CN2-5) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI10 (CN2-5).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA021 *HDIB1 DI11 (CN2-18) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI11 (CN2-18).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA022 *HDIB2 DI11 (CN2-18) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI11 (CN2-18).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA023 *HDIC1 DI12 (CN2-6) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI12 (CN2-6).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 25
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTA024 *HDIC2 DI12 (CN2-6) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI12 (CN2-6).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA027 *HDO11 DO1 (CN2-20) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO1 (CN2-20).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA028 *HDO12 DO1 (CN2-20) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO1 (CN2-20).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 26
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTA029 *HDO21 DO2 (CN2-8) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO2 (CN2-8).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA030 *HDO22 DO2 (CN2-8) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO2 (CN2-8).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA032 *AOP1 Function selection A-1 Select a detection method for [AL. 10.3].
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x [AL. 10.3] detection selection Select enabled/disabled for detecting [AL. 10.3]. 0: Enabled 1: Disabled Select "1" when not using the digital output of the head module.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 27
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTA033 *LO1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Detailed setting 1 Select a signal for the setting group 1 of the level output function.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Module selection Select a module to be used for the level output function. 0: Unused 1: 1st extension module 2: 2nd extension module 3: 3rd extension module 4: 4th extension module
0h
_ _ x _ Channel selection Select a channel to be used. Set as shown in Table 9.1 according to the module to be used.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
Table 9.1 Level output function channel selection
Setting value
Module (Note)
MR-MT2200 pulse I/O module
MR-MT2300 analog I/O module
MR-MT2400 encoder I/F module
0 AX.A Analog input ch. 1 Ch. A
1 AX.B Analog input ch. 2 Ch. B
2 Analog input ch. 3
3 Analog input ch. 4
8 Analog output ch. 1
9 Analog output ch. 2
A Analog output ch. 3
B Analog output ch. 4
Note. The digital output will be off if an alarm is generated in the selected module.
PTA034 LONL1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Lower limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTA035] and lower [Pr. PTA034].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTA035 LONH1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Lower limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTA035] and lower [Pr. PTA034].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTA036 LOFL1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Upper limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTA037] and lower [Pr. PTA036].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTA037 LOFH1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Upper limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTA037] and lower [Pr. PTA036].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 28
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTA038 *LO2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Detailed setting 1 Select a signal for the setting group 2 of the level output function.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Module selection Select a module to be used for the level output function. 0: Unused 1: 1st extension module 2: 2nd extension module 3: 3rd extension module 4: 4th extension module
0h
_ _ x _ Channel selection Select a channel to be used. Set as shown in Table 9.1 in [Pr. PTA033] according to the module to be used.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTA039 LONL2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Lower limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTA040] and lower [Pr. PTA039].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTA040 LONH2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Lower limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTA040] and lower [Pr. PTA039].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTA041 LOFL2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Upper limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTA042] and lower [Pr. PTA041].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTA042 LOFH2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Upper limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTA042] and lower [Pr. PTA041].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 29
(2) MR-MT2100 I/O module
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB001 *IDI11 DI1 (CN1-10) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI1 (CN1-10).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB002 *IDI12 DI1 (CN1-10) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI1 (CN1-10).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB003 *IDI21 DI2 (CN1-1) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI2 (CN1-1).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB004 *IDI22 DI2 (CN1-1) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI2 (CN1-1).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 30
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB005 *IDI31 DI3 (CN1-11) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI3 (CN1-11).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB006 *IDI32 DI3 (CN1-11) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI3 (CN1-11).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB007 *IDI41 DI4 (CN1-2) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI4 (CN1-2).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB008 *IDI42 DI4 (CN1-2) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI4 (CN1-2).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 31
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB009 *IDI51 DI5 (CN1-12) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI5 (CN1-12).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB010 *IDI52 DI5 (CN1-12) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI5 (CN1-12).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB011 *IDI61 DI6 (CN1-3) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI6 (CN1-3).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB012 *IDI62 DI6 (CN1-3) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI6 (CN1-3).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 32
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB013 *IDI71 DI7 (CN1-13) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI7 (CN1-13).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB014 *IDI72 DI7 (CN1-13) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI7 (CN1-13).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB015 *IDI81 DI8 (CN1-4) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI8 (CN1-4).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB016 *IDI82 DI8 (CN1-4) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI8 (CN1-4).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 33
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB017 *IDI91 DI9 (CN1-14) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI9 (CN1-14).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB018 *IDI92 DI9 (CN1-14) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI9 (CN1-14).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB019 *IDIA1 DI10 (CN1-5) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI10 (CN1-5).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB020 *IDIA2 DI10 (CN1-5) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI10 (CN1-5).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 34
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB021 *IDIB1 DI11 (CN1-15) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI11 (CN1-15).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB022 *IDIB2 DI11 (CN1-15) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI11 (CN1-15).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB023 *IDIC1 DI12 (CN1-6) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI12 (CN1-6).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB024 *IDIC2 DI12 (CN1-6) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI12 (CN1-6).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 35
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB025 *IDID1 DI13 (CN1-16) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI13 (CN1-16).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB026 *IDID2 DI13 (CN1-16) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI13 (CN1-16).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB027 *IDIE1 DI14 (CN1-7) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI14 (CN1-7).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB028 *IDIE2 DI14 (CN1-7) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI14 (CN1-7).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 36
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB029 *IDIF1 DI15 (CN1-17) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI15 (CN1-17).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB030 *IDIF2 DI15 (CN1-17) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI15 (CN1-17).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB031 *IDIG1 DI16 (CN1-8) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI16 (CN1-8).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB032 *IDIG2 DI16 (CN1-8) setting 2 Set a function for the input signal DI16 (CN1-8).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital input signal. 0: Digital input 1: Timing latch input
0h
_ _ x _ Digital input signal edge selection Select an edge for the timing latch input. 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 37
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB037 *IDO11 DO1 (CN2-11) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO1 (CN2-11).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB038 *IDO12 DO1 (CN2-11) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO1 (CN2-11).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 38
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB039 *IDO21 DO2 (CN2-1) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO2 (CN2-1).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB040 *IDO22 DO2 (CN2-1) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO2 (CN2-1).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 39
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB041 *IDO31 DO3 (CN2-12) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO3 (CN2-12).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB042 *IDO32 DO3 (CN2-12) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO3 (CN2-12).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 40
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB043 *IDO41 DO4 (CN2-2) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO4 (CN2-2).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB044 *IDO42 DO4 (CN2-2) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO4 (CN2-2).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 41
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB045 *IDO51 DO5 (CN2-13) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO5 (CN2-13).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB046 *IDO52 DO5 (CN2-13) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO5 (CN2-13).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 42
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB047 *IDO61 DO6 (CN2-3) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO6 (CN2-3).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB048 *IDO62 DO6 (CN2-3) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO6 (CN2-3).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 43
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB049 *IDO71 DO7 (CN2-14) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO7 (CN2-14).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB050 *IDO72 DO7 (CN2-14) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO7 (CN2-14).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 44
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB051 *IDO81 DO8 (CN2-4) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO8 (CN2-4).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB052 *IDO82 DO8 (CN2-4) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO8 (CN2-4).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 45
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB053 *IDO91 DO9 (CN2-15) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO9 (CN2-15).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB054 *IDO92 DO9 (CN2-15) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO9 (CN2-15).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 46
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB055 *IDOA1 DO10 (CN2-5) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO10 (CN2-5).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB056 *IDOA2 DO10 (CN2-5) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO10 (CN2-5).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 47
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB057 *IDOB1 DO11 (CN2-16) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO11 (CN2-16).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB058 *IDOB2 DO11 (CN2-16) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO11 (CN2-16).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 48
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB059 *IDOC1 DO12 (CN2-6) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO12 (CN2-6).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB060 *IDOC2 DO12 (CN2-6) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO12 (CN2-6).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 49
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB061 *IDOD1 DO13 (CN2-17) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO13 (CN2-17).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB062 *IDOD2 DO13 (CN2-17) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO13 (CN2-17).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 50
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB063 *IDOE1 DO14 (CN2-7) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO14 (CN2-7).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB064 *IDOE2 DO14 (CN2-7) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO14 (CN2-7).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 51
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB065 *IDOF1 DO15 (CN2-18) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO15 (CN2-18).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB066 *IDOF2 DO15 (CN2-18) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO15 (CN2-18).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 52
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB067 *IDOG1 DO16 (CN2-8) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO16 (CN2-8).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB068 *IDOG2 DO16 (CN2-8) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO16 (CN2-8).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 2: Level output The digital output will be always off when other than above is set.
0h
_ _ x _ Level output function - Setting group selection Select a setting group for using the level output function. 0: Setting group 1 1: Setting group 2 2: Setting group 3 3: Setting group 4 4: Setting group 5 5: Setting group 6 6: Setting group 7 7: Setting group 8
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB069 *IDO Digital output connection setting Set a connection method for digital output.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Connection method selection Set a connection method for digital output. 0: Sink connection 1: Source connection This parameter setting is available when connecting with head modules with software version A1 or later.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 53
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB073 *ILO1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Detailed setting 1 Select a signal for the setting group 1 of the level output function.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Module selection Select a module to be used for the level output function. 0: Unused 1: 1st extension module 2: 2nd extension module 3: 3rd extension module 4: 4th extension module
0h
_ _ x _ Channel selection Select a channel to be used. Set as shown in Table 9.2 according to the module to be used.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
Table 9.2 Level output function channel selection
Setting value
Module (Note)
MR-MT2200 pulse I/O module
MR-MT2300 analog I/O module
MR-MT2400 encoder I/F module
0 AX.A Analog input ch. 1 Ch. A
1 AX.B Analog input ch. 2 Ch. B
2 Analog input ch. 3
3 Analog input ch. 4
8 Analog output ch. 1
9 Analog output ch. 2
A Analog output ch. 3
B Analog output ch. 4
Note. The digital output will be off if an alarm is generated in the selected module.
PTB074 ILONL1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Lower limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB075] and lower [Pr. PTB074].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB075 ILONH1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Lower limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB075] and lower [Pr. PTB074].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB076 ILOFL1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Upper limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB077] and lower [Pr. PTB076].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB077 ILOFH1 Level output function - Setting group 1 - Upper limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB077] and lower [Pr. PTB076].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 54
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB078 *ILO2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Detailed setting 1 Select a signal for the setting group 2 of the level output function.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Module selection Select a module to be used for the level output function. 0: Unused 1: 1st extension module 2: 2nd extension module 3: 3rd extension module 4: 4th extension module
0h
_ _ x _ Channel selection Select a channel to be used. Set as shown in Table 9.2 in [Pr. PTB073] according to the module to be used.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB079 ILONL2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Lower limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB080] and lower [Pr. PTB079].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB080 ILONH2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Lower limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB080] and lower [Pr. PTB079].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB081 ILOFL2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Upper limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB082] and lower [Pr. PTB081].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB082 ILOFH2 Level output function - Setting group 2 - Upper limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB082] and lower [Pr. PTB081].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB083 *ILO3 Level output function - Setting group 3 - Detailed setting 1 Select a signal for the setting group 3 of the level output function.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Module selection Select a module to be used for the level output function. 0: Unused 1: 1st extension module 2: 2nd extension module 3: 3rd extension module 4: 4th extension module
0h
_ _ x _ Channel selection Select a channel to be used. Set as shown in Table 9.2 in [Pr. PTB073] according to the module to be used.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 55
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB084 ILONL3 Level output function - Setting group 3 - Lower limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB085] and lower [Pr. PTB084].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB085 ILONH3 Level output function - Setting group 3 - Lower limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB085] and lower [Pr. PTB084].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB086 ILOFL3 Level output function - Setting group 3 - Upper limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB087] and lower [Pr. PTB086].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB087 ILOFH3 Level output function - Setting group 3 - Upper limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB087] and lower [Pr. PTB086].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB088 *ILO4 Level output function - Setting group 4 - Detailed setting 1 Select a signal for the setting group 4 of the level output function.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Module selection Select a module to be used for the level output function. 0: Unused 1: 1st extension module 2: 2nd extension module 3: 3rd extension module 4: 4th extension module
0h
_ _ x _ Channel selection Select a channel to be used. Set as shown in Table 9.2 in [Pr. PTB073] according to the module to be used.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB089 ILONL4 Level output function - Setting group 4 - Lower limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB090] and lower [Pr. PTB089].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB090 ILONH4 Level output function - Setting group 4 - Lower limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB090] and lower [Pr. PTB089].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB091 ILOFL4 Level output function - Setting group 4 - Upper limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB092] and lower [Pr. PTB091].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB092 ILOFH4 Level output function - Setting group 4 - Upper limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB092] and lower [Pr. PTB091].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 56
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB093 *ILO5 Level output function - Setting group 5 - Detailed setting 1 Select a signal for the setting group 5 of the level output function.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Module selection Select a module to be used for the level output function. 0: Unused 1: 1st extension module 2: 2nd extension module 3: 3rd extension module 4: 4th extension module
0h
_ _ x _ Channel selection Select a channel to be used. Set as shown in Table 9.2 in [Pr. PTB073] according to the module to be used.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB094 ILONL5 Level output function - Setting group 5 - Lower limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB095] and lower [Pr. PTB094].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB095 ILONH5 Level output function - Setting group 5 - Lower limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB095] and lower [Pr. PTB094].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB096 ILOFL5 Level output function - Setting group 5 - Upper limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB097] and lower [Pr. PTB096].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB097 ILOFH5 Level output function - Setting group 5 - Upper limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB097] and lower [Pr. PTB096].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB098 *ILO6 Level output function - Setting group 6 - Detailed setting 1 Select a signal for the setting group 6 of the level output function.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Module selection Select a module to be used for the level output function. 0: Unused 1: 1st extension module 2: 2nd extension module 3: 3rd extension module 4: 4th extension module
0h
_ _ x _ Channel selection Select a channel to be used. Set as shown in Table 9.2 in [Pr. PTB073] according to the module to be used.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 57
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB099 ILONL6 Level output function - Setting group 6 - Lower limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB100] and lower [Pr. PTB099].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB100 ILONH6 Level output function - Setting group 6 - Lower limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB100] and lower [Pr. PTB099].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB101 ILOFL6 Level output function - Setting group 6 - Upper limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB102] and lower [Pr. PTB101].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB102 ILOFH6 Level output function - Setting group 6 - Upper limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB102] and lower [Pr. PTB101].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB103 *ILO7 Level output function - Setting group 7 - Detailed setting 1 Select a signal for the setting group 7 of the level output function.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Module selection Select a module to be used for the level output function. 0: Unused 1: 1st extension module 2: 2nd extension module 3: 3rd extension module 4: 4th extension module
0h
_ _ x _ Channel selection Select a channel to be used. Set as shown in Table 9.2 in [Pr. PTB073] according to the module to be used.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB104 ILONL7 Level output function - Setting group 7 - Lower limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB105] and lower [Pr. PTB104].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB105 ILONH7 Level output function - Setting group 7 - Lower limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB105] and lower [Pr. PTB104].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB106 ILOFL7 Level output function - Setting group 7 - Upper limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB107] and lower [Pr. PTB106].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB107 ILOFH7 Level output function - Setting group 7 - Upper limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB107] and lower [Pr. PTB106].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 58
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTB108 *ILO8 Level output function - Setting group 8 - Detailed setting 1 Select a signal for the setting group 8 of the level output function.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Module selection Select a module to be used for the level output function. 0: Unused 1: 1st extension module 2: 2nd extension module 3: 3rd extension module 4: 4th extension module
0h
_ _ x _ Channel selection Select a channel to be used. Set as shown in Table 9.2 in [Pr. PTB073] according to the module to be used.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTB109 ILONL8 Level output function - Setting group 8 - Lower limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB110] and lower [Pr. PTB109].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB110 ILONH8 Level output function - Setting group 8 - Lower limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the lower limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB110] and lower [Pr. PTB109].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB111 ILOFL8 Level output function - Setting group 8 - Upper limit setting - Lower Set the lower digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB112] and lower [Pr. PTB111].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
PTB112 ILOFH8 Level output function - Setting group 8 - Upper limit setting - Upper Set the upper digits for the upper limit with the level output function. Set with 32-bit signed hexadecimal values by combining upper [Pr. PTB112] and lower [Pr. PTB111].
0000h 0000h to
FFFFh
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 59
(3) MR-MT2200 pulse I/O module
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC001 *PFSA A-axis setting Select an I/O function for A-axis of the pulse I/O module.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x I/O function selection Select a function for A-axis of the pulse I/O module. 0: Pulse input function 1: Pulse output function
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC002 *PIFA1 A-axis input function setting 1 Select a pulse command form and logic when the pulse input function is selected with A-axis of the pulse I/O module.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Input pulse command form selection Select a pulse command form for input pulse. 0: Forward/reverse rotation pulse train 1: Signed pulse train 2: A-phase/B-phase pulse train (The pulse I/O module
imports input pulses after multiplying by four.)
0h
_ _ x _ Input pulse logic selection Select a logic for input pulse. 0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC003 *PIFA2 A-axis input function setting 2 Select a filter for the input pulses of A-axis of the pulse I/O module.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Input pulse train filter selection Noise tolerance is improved when an appropriate filter for the input pulse frequency is selected. 0: Input pulse train is 4 Mpulses/s or less. 1: Input pulse train is 1 Mpulse/s or less. 2: Input pulse train is 500 kpulses/s or less. 3: Input pulse train is 200 kpulses/s or less. 1 Mpulse/s or lower input is supported by "1". When inputting pulses exceeding 1 Mpulse/s and up to 4 Mpulses/s, set "0". Incorrect setting may cause the following malfunctions.
The noise tolerance will be lower when a value higher than the actual input pulses is set. The pulses cannot be inputted correctly when a value lower than the actual input pulses is set.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 60
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC004 *POFA1 A-axis output function selection 1 Set for A-axis of the pulse I/O module when the pulse output function is used.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Output pulse command form selection Select an output pulse command form for output pulse. 0: Forward/reverse rotation pulse train 1: Signed pulse train 2: A-phase/B-phase pulse train (The pulse I/O module
outputs pulses after multiplying by four.)
0h
_ _ x _ Output pulse logic selection Select a logic for output pulse. 0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic
0h
_ x _ _ Output pulse rotation direction selection Select the rotation direction of output pulse. 0: CCW when commands are increasing (forward
rotation pulse output) 1: CW when commands are increasing (reverse
rotation pulse output)
0h
x _ _ _ Connection form selection Select a connection form for outputting pulses. 0: Differential line driver connection 1: Open-collector connection
0h
PTC005 *POFA2 A-axis output function selection 2 Set for A-axis of the pulse I/O module when the output function is used.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Open-collector output function selection Select open-collector output function. 0: Pulse output (CWA, CCWA) 1: Digital output (DO4, DO5)
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC007 *CMXA A-axis input-side electronic gear setting Set an electronic gear when the pulse input function is selected. The electronic gear is applied for the pulses inputted to the pulse I/O module, and the pulses are returned to the controller.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Input-side electronic gear Set an electronic gear for the input side. 0: 1 1: 2 2: 4 3: 8
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 61
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC008 *CDVA A-axis output-side electronic gear setting Set an electronic gear when the pulse output function is selected. The electronic gear is applied for the output command pulses from the controller.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Output-side electronic gear Set an electronic gear for the output side. 0: 1 1: 1/2 2: 1/4 3: 1/8
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC017 *PFSB B-axis setting Select an I/O function for B-axis of the pulse I/O module.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x I/O function selection Select a function for B-axis of the pulse I/O module. 0: Pulse input function 1: Pulse output function
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC018 *PIFB1 B-axis input function setting 1 Select a pulse command form and logic when the pulse input function is selected with B-axis of the pulse I/O module.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Input pulse command form selection Select a pulse command form for input pulse. 0: Forward/reverse rotation pulse train 1: Signed pulse train 2: A-phase/B-phase pulse train (The pulse I/O module
imports input pulses after multiplying by four.)
0h
_ _ x _ Input pulse logic selection Select a logic for input pulse. 0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 62
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC019 *PIFB2 B-axis input function setting 2 Select a filter for the input pulses of B-axis of the pulse I/O module.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Input pulse train filter selection Noise tolerance is improved when an appropriate filter for the input pulse frequency is selected. 0: Input pulse train is 4 Mpulses/s or less. 1: Input pulse train is 1 Mpulse/s or less. 2: Input pulse train is 500 kpulses/s or less. 3: Input pulse train is 200 kpulses/s or less. 1 Mpulse/s or lower input is supported by "1". When inputting pulses exceeding 1 Mpulse/s and up to 4 Mpulses/s, set "0". Incorrect setting may cause the following malfunctions.
The noise tolerance will be lower when a value higher than the actual input pulses is set. The pulses cannot be inputted correctly when a value lower than the actual input pulses is set.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC020 *POFB1 B-axis output function selection 1 Set for B-axis of the pulse I/O module when the pulse output function is used.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Output pulse command form selection Select an output pulse command form for output pulse. 0: Forward/reverse rotation pulse train 1: Signed pulse train 2: A-phase/B-phase pulse train (The pulse I/O module
outputs pulses after multiplying by four.)
0h
_ _ x _ Output pulse logic selection Select a logic for output pulse. 0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic
0h
_ x _ _ Output pulse rotation direction selection Select the rotation direction of output pulse. 0: CCW when commands are increasing (forward
rotation pulse output) 1: CW when commands are increasing (reverse
rotation pulse output)
0h
x _ _ _ Connection form selection Select a connection form for outputting pulses. 0: Differential line driver connection 1: Open-collector connection
0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 63
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC021 *POFB2 B-axis output function selection 2 Set for B-axis of the pulse I/O module when the output function is used.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Open-collector output function selection Select open-collector output function. 0: Pulse output (CWB, CCWB) 1: Digital output (DO11, DO12)
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC023 *CMXB B-axis input-side electronic gear setting Set an electronic gear when the pulse input function is selected. The electronic gear is applied for the pulses inputted to the pulse I/O module, and the pulses are returned to the controller.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Input-side electronic gear Set an electronic gear for the input side. 0: 1 1: 2 2: 4 3: 8
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC024 *CDVB B-axis input-side electronic gear setting Set an electronic gear when the pulse output function is selected. The electronic gear is applied for the output command pulses from the controller.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Output-side electronic gear Set an electronic gear for the output side. 0: 1 1: 1/2 2: 1/4 3: 1/8
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC033 *IDI1A1 DI1A (CN1-8) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI1A (CN1-8).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 64
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC035 *IDI2A1 DI2A (CN1-10) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI2A (CN1-10).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC037 *IDI3A1 DI3A (CN1-7) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI3A (CN1-7).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC039 *IDI4A1 DI4A (CN1-9) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI4A (CN1-9).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC041 *IDI5A1 DI5A (CN1-19) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI5A (CN1-19).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 65
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC043 *IDI6A1 DI6A (CN1-20) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI6A (CN1-20).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC045 *IDI7A1 DI7A (CN1-21) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI7A (CN1-21).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC047 *IDI1B1 DI1B (CN2-8) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI1B (CN2-8).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC049 *IDI2B1 DI2B (CN2-10) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI2B (CN2-10).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 66
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC051 *IDI3B1 DI3B (CN2-7) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI3B (CN2-7).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC053 *IDI4B1 DI4B (CN2-9) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI4B (CN2-9).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC055 *IDI5B1 DI5B (CN2-19) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI5B (CN2-19).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC057 *IDI6B1 DI6B (CN2-20) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI6B (CN2-20).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 67
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC059 *IDI7B1 DI7B (CN2-21) setting 1 Set a function for the input signal DI7B (CN2-21).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC065 *IDO1A1 DO1A (CN1-11) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO1A (CN1-11).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
When "Pulse coincidence output (_ _ _ 1)" is selected with "function selection" of [Pr. PTC066], this digit will be always set to "CLEAR" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC066 *IDO1A2 DO1A (CN1-11) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO1A (CN1-11).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 1: Pulse coincidence output When "Pulse input function (_ _ _ 0)" is selected with "I/O function selection" of [Pr. PTC001], this digit will be always set to "digital output" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 68
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC067 *IDO2A1 DO2A (CN1-12) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO2A (CN1-12).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
When "Pulse coincidence output (_ _ _ 1)" is selected with "function selection" of [Pr. PTC068], this digit will be always set to "CLEAR" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC068 *IDO2A2 DO2A (CN1-12) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO2A (CN1-12).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 1: Pulse coincidence output When "Pulse input function (_ _ _ 0)" is selected with "I/O function selection" of [Pr. PTC001], this digit will be always set to "digital output" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 69
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC069 *IDO3A1 DO3A (CN1-23) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO3A (CN1-23).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
When "Pulse coincidence output (_ _ _ 1)" is selected with "function selection" of [Pr. PTC070], this digit will be always set to "CLEAR" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC070 *IDO3A2 DO3A (CN1-23) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO3A (CN1-23).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 1: Pulse coincidence output When "Pulse input function (_ _ _ 0)" is selected with "I/O function selection" of [Pr. PTC001], this digit will be always set to "digital output" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 70
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC071 *IDO4A1 DO4A (CN1-1) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO4A (CN1-1).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
When "Pulse coincidence output (_ _ _ 1)" is selected with "function selection" of [Pr. PTC072], this digit will be always set to "CLEAR" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC072 *IDO4A2 DO4A (CN1-1) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO4A (CN1-1).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 1: Pulse coincidence output When "Pulse input function (_ _ _ 0)" is selected with "I/O function selection" of [Pr. PTC001], this digit will be always set to "digital output" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 71
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC073 *IDO5A1 DO5A (CN1-13) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO5A (CN1-13).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
When "Pulse coincidence output (_ _ _ 1)" is selected with "function selection" of [Pr. PTC074], this digit will be always set to "CLEAR" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC074 *IDO5A2 DO5A (CN1-13) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO5A (CN1-13).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 1: Pulse coincidence output When "Pulse input function (_ _ _ 0)" is selected with "I/O function selection" of [Pr. PTC001], this digit will be always set to "digital output" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 72
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC075 *IDO1B1 DO1B (CN2-11) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO1B (CN2-11).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
When "Pulse coincidence output (_ _ _ 1)" is selected with "function selection" of [Pr. PTC076], this digit will be always set to "CLEAR" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC076 *IDO1B2 DO1B (CN2-11) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO1B (CN2-11).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 1: Pulse coincidence output When "Pulse input function (_ _ _ 0)" is selected with "I/O function selection" of [Pr. PTC017], this digit will be always set to "digital output" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 73
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC077 *IDO2B1 DO2B (CN2-12) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO2B (CN2-12).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
When "Pulse coincidence output (_ _ _ 1)" is selected with "function selection" of [Pr. PTC078], this digit will be always set to "CLEAR" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC078 *IDO2B2 DO2B (CN2-12) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO2B (CN2-12).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 1: Pulse coincidence output When "Pulse input function (_ _ _ 0)" is selected with "I/O function selection" of [Pr. PTC017], this digit will be always set to "digital output" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 74
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC079 *IDO3B1 DO3B (CN2-23) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO3B (CN2-23).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
When "Pulse coincidence output (_ _ _ 1)" is selected with "function selection" of [Pr. PTC080], this digit will be always set to "CLEAR" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC080 *IDO3B2 DO3B (CN2-23) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO3B (CN2-23).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 1: Pulse coincidence output When "Pulse input function (_ _ _ 0)" is selected with "I/O function selection" of [Pr. PTC017], this digit will be always set to "digital output" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 75
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC081 *IDO4B1 DO4B (CN2-1) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO4B (CN2-1).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
When "Pulse coincidence output (_ _ _ 1)" is selected with "function selection" of [Pr. PTC082], this digit will be always set to "CLEAR" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC082 *IDO4B2 DO4B (CN2-1) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO4B (CN2-1).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 1: Pulse coincidence output When "Pulse input function (_ _ _ 0)" is selected with "I/O function selection" of [Pr. PTC017], this digit will be always set to "digital output" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 76
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTC083 *IDO5B1 DO5B (CN2-1) setting 1 Set a function for the output signal DO5B (CN2-13).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
When "Pulse coincidence output (_ _ _ 1)" is selected with "function selection" of [Pr. PTC084], this digit will be always set to "CLEAR" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTC084 *IDO5B2 DO5B (CN2-13) setting 2 Set a function for the output signal DO5B (CN2-13).
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Function selection Select a function for the digital output signal. 0: Digital output 1: Pulse coincidence output When "Pulse input function (_ _ _ 0)" is selected with "I/O function selection" of [Pr. PTC017], this digit will be always set to "digital output" regardless of the setting value.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 77
(4) MR-MT2300 analog I/O module
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTD001 *AIF1 Analog input function selection 1 Set a function of analog input.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Analog input sampling cycle Select an analog input sampling cycle. 0: 55 s 1: 111 s 2: 222 s 3: 444 s 4: 888 s 5: 1.7 ms
0h
_ _ x _ Analog input voltage selection Set a voltage range of analog input. 0: 10 V DC 1: 5 V DC
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTD002 *AI1F2 Analog input ch. 1 - Function selection 2 Set a function of analog input ch. 1.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Input filter selection Select a filter for analog input. 0: Non-filter 1: Count average 2: Moving average 3: Primary delay filter (Set the time constant with [Pr.
PTD003].)
0h
_ _ x _ Count setting for when the count average or moving average is selected Select the average number of processing times when the count average or moving average is selected. 0: None 1: 2 times 2: 4 times 3: 8 times 4: 16 times
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 78
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTD003 *AI1FT Analog input ch. 1 - Primary delay filter time constant Set a primary delay filter time constant of analog input ch. 1. This parameter will be enabled when "Primary delay filter (_ _ _ 3)" is selected with "Input filter selection" of [Pr. PTD002]. The setting range depends on "Analog input sampling cycle" of [Pr. PTD001]. The following shows the setting range. Setting over the range will trigger [AL. 37.2].
0 [ms]
Refer to the Name and function column.
[Pr. PTD001] Setting range
_ _ _ 0 (55 s) 0 to 3
_ _ _ 1 (111 s) 0 to 6
_ _ _ 2 (222 s) 0 to 12
_ _ _ 3 (444 s) 0 to 25
_ _ _ 4 (888 s) 0 to 50
_ _ _ 5 (1.7 ms) 0 to 100
PTD004 AI1OF Analog input ch. 1 - Offset voltage setting Set the offset voltage of analog input ch. 1. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD004] to [Pr. PTD007]. In this case, perform the following.
An alarm may occur when the difference in the setting of [Pr. PTD005 Analog input ch. 1 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting] and [Pr. PTD006 Analog input ch. 1 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting] is small. In this case, make the difference larger. An alarm may occur when the setting of [Pr. PTD007 Analog input ch. 1 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting] is large. In this case, set the value smaller.
0 [mV]
-10000 to
10000
PTD005 *AI1SH Analog input ch. 1 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting Set the upper limit of the internal value when +10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD004] to [Pr. PTD007]. Refer to [Pr. PTD004] for details.
20000 -32768 to
32767
PTD006 *AI1SL Analog input ch. 1 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting Set the lower limit of the internal value when -10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD004] to [Pr. PTD007]. Refer to [Pr. PTD004] for details.
-20000 -32768 to
32767
PTD007 *AI1SF Analog input ch. 1 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting Set the shift amount of the analog input signal for the scaling function. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD004] to [Pr. PTD007]. Refer to [Pr. PTD004] for details.
0 -32768 to
32767
PTD010 *AI2F2 Analog input ch. 2 - Function selection 2 Set a function of analog input ch. 2.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Input filter selection Select a filter for analog input. 0: Non-filter 1: Count average 2: Moving average 3: Primary delay filter (Set the time constant with [Pr.
PTD011].)
0h
_ _ x _ Count setting for when the count average or moving average is selected Select the average number of processing times when the count average or moving average is selected. 0: None 1: 2 times 2: 4 times 3: 8 times 4: 16 times
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 79
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTD011 *AI2FT Analog input ch. 2 - Primary delay filter time constant Set a primary delay filter time constant of analog input ch. 2. This parameter will be enabled when "Primary delay filter (_ _ _ 3)" is selected with "Input filter selection" of [Pr. PTD010]. The setting range depends on "Analog input sampling cycle" of [Pr. PTD001]. The following shows the setting range. Setting over the range will trigger [AL. 37.2].
0 [ms]
Refer to the Name and function column.
[Pr. PTD001] Setting range
_ _ _ 0 (55 s) 0 to 3
_ _ _ 1 (111 s) 0 to 6
_ _ _ 2 (222 s) 0 to 12
_ _ _ 3 (444 s) 0 to 25
_ _ _ 4 (888 s) 0 to 50
_ _ _ 5 (1.7 ms) 0 to 100
PTD012 AI2OF Analog input ch. 2 - Offset voltage setting Set the offset voltage of analog input ch. 2. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD012] to [Pr. PTD015]. In this case, perform the following.
An alarm may occur when the difference in the setting of [Pr. PTD013 Analog input ch. 2 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting] and [Pr. PTD014 Analog input ch. 2 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting] is small. In this case, make the difference larger. An alarm may occur when the setting of [Pr. PTD015 Analog input ch. 2 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting] is large. In this case, set the value smaller.
0 [mV]
-10000 to
10000
PTD013 *AI2SH Analog input ch. 2 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting Set the upper limit of the internal value when +10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD012] to [Pr. PTD015]. Refer to [Pr. PTD012] for details.
20000 -32768 to
32767
PTD014 *AI2SL Analog input ch. 2 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting Set the lower limit of the internal value when -10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD012] to [Pr. PTD015]. Refer to [Pr. PTD012] for details.
-20000 -32768 to
32767
PTD015 *AI2SF Analog input ch. 2 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting Set the shift amount of the analog input signal for the scaling function. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD012] to [Pr. PTD015]. Refer to [Pr. PTD012] for details.
0 -32768 to
32767
PTD018 *AI3F2 Analog input ch. 3 - Function selection 2 Set a function of analog input ch. 3.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Input filter selection Select a filter for analog input. 0: Non-filter 1: Count average 2: Moving average 3: Primary delay filter (Set the time constant with [Pr.
PTD019].)
0h
_ _ x _ Count setting for when the count average or moving average is selected Select the average number of processing times when the count average or moving average is selected. 0: None 1: 2 times 2: 4 times 3: 8 times 4: 16 times
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 80
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTD019 *AI3FT Analog input ch. 3 - Primary delay filter time constant Set a primary delay filter time constant of analog input ch. 3. This parameter will be enabled when "Primary delay filter (_ _ _ 3)" is selected with "Input filter selection" of [Pr. PTD018]. The setting range depends on "Analog input sampling cycle" of [Pr. PTD001]. The following shows the setting range. Setting over the range will trigger [AL. 37.2].
0 [ms]
Refer to the Name and function column.
[Pr. PTD001] Setting range
_ _ _ 0 (55 s) 0 to 3
_ _ _ 1 (111 s) 0 to 6
_ _ _ 2 (222 s) 0 to 12
_ _ _ 3 (444 s) 0 to 25
_ _ _ 4 (888 s) 0 to 50
_ _ _ 5 (1.7 ms) 0 to 100
PTD020 AI3OF Analog input ch. 3 - Offset voltage setting Set the offset voltage of analog input ch. 3. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD020] to [Pr. PTD023]. In this case, perform the following.
An alarm may occur when the difference in the setting of [Pr. PTD021 Analog input ch. 3 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting] and [Pr. PTD022 Analog input ch. 3 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting] is small. In this case, make the difference larger. An alarm may occur when the setting of [Pr. PTD023 Analog input ch. 3 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting] is large. In this case, set the value smaller.
0 [mV]
-10000 to
10000
PTD021 *AI3SH Analog input ch. 3 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting Set the upper limit of the internal value when +10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD020] to [Pr. PTD023]. Refer to [Pr. PTD020] for details.
20000 -32768 to
32767
PTD022 *AI3SL Analog input ch. 3 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting Set the lower limit of the internal value when -10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD020] to [Pr. PTD023]. Refer to [Pr. PTD020] for details.
-20000 -32768 to
32767
PTD023 *AI3SF Analog input ch. 3 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting Set the shift amount of the analog input signal for the scaling function. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD020] to [Pr. PTD023]. Refer to [Pr. PTD020] for details.
0 -32768 to
32767
PTD026 *AI4F2 Analog input ch. 4 - Function selection 2 Set a function of analog input ch. 4.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Input filter selection Select a filter for analog input. 0: Non-filter 1: Count average 2: Moving average 3: Primary delay filter (Set the time constant with [Pr.
PTD027].)
0h
_ _ x _ Count setting for when the count average or moving average is selected Select the average number of processing times when the count average or moving average is selected. 0: None 1: 2 times 2: 4 times 3: 8 times 4: 16 times
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 81
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTD027 *AI4FT Analog input ch. 4 - Primary delay filter time constant Set a primary delay filter time constant of analog input ch. 4. This parameter will be enabled when "Primary delay filter (_ _ _ 3)" is selected with "Input filter selection" of [Pr. PTD026]. The setting range depends on "Analog input sampling cycle" of [Pr. PTD001]. The following shows the setting range. Setting over the range will trigger [AL. 37.2].
0 [ms]
Refer to the Name and function column.
[Pr. PTD001] Setting range
_ _ _ 0 (55 s) 0 to 3
_ _ _ 1 (111 s) 0 to 6
_ _ _ 2 (222 s) 0 to 12
_ _ _ 3 (444 s) 0 to 25
_ _ _ 4 (888 s) 0 to 50
_ _ _ 5 (1.7 ms) 0 to 100
PTD028 AI4OF Analog input ch. 4 - Offset voltage setting Set the offset voltage of analog input ch. 4. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD028] to [Pr. PTD031]. In this case, perform the following.
An alarm may occur when the difference in the setting of [Pr. PTD029 Analog input ch. 4 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting] and [Pr. PTD030 Analog input ch. 4 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting] is small. In this case, make the difference larger. An alarm may occur when the setting of [Pr. PTD031 Analog input ch. 4 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting] is large. In this case, set the value smaller.
0 [mV]
-10000 to
10000
PTD029 *AI4SH Analog input ch. 4 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting Set the upper limit of the internal value when +10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD028] to [Pr. PTD031]. Refer to [Pr. PTD028] for details.
20000 -32768 to
32767
PTD030 *AI4SL Analog input ch. 4 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting Set the lower limit of the internal value when -10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD028] to [Pr. PTD031]. Refer to [Pr. PTD028] for details.
-20000 -32768 to
32767
PTD031 *AI4SF Analog input ch. 4 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting Set the shift amount of the analog input signal for the scaling function. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD028] to [Pr. PTD031]. Refer to [Pr. PTD028] for details.
0 -32768 to
32767
PTD034 AO1OF Analog output ch. 1 - Offset Set the offset of analog output ch. 1. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD034] to [Pr. PTD037]. In this case, perform the following.
An alarm may occur when the difference in the setting of [Pr. PTD035 Analog output ch. 1 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting] and [Pr. PTD036 Analog output ch. 1 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting] is small. In this case, make the difference larger. An alarm may occur when the setting of [Pr. PTD037 Analog output ch. 1 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting] is large. In this case, set the value smaller.
0 [mV]
-10000 to
10000
PTD035 *AO1SH Analog output ch. 1 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting Set the internal value when +10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD034] to [Pr. PTD037]. Refer to [Pr. PTD034] for details.
20000 -32768 to
32767
PTD036 *AO1SL Analog output ch. 1 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting Set the internal value when -10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD034] to [Pr. PTD037]. Refer to [Pr. PTD034] for details.
-20000 -32768 to
32767
PTD037 *AO1SF Analog output ch. 1 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting Set the shift amount of the analog output signal for the scaling function. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD034] to [Pr. PTD037]. Refer to [Pr. PTD034] for details.
0 -32768 to
32767
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 82
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTD042 AO2OF Analog output ch. 2 - Offset Set the offset of analog output ch. 2. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD042] to [Pr. PTD045]. In this case, perform the following.
An alarm may occur when the difference in the setting of [Pr. PTD043 Analog output ch. 2 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting] and [Pr. PTD044 Analog output ch. 2 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting] is small. In this case, make the difference larger. An alarm may occur when the setting of [Pr. PTD045 Analog output ch. 2 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting] is large. In this case, set the value smaller.
0 [mV]
-10000 to
10000
PTD043 *AO2SH Analog output ch. 2 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting Set the internal value when +10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD042] to [Pr. PTD045]. Refer to [Pr. PTD042] for details.
20000 -32768 to
32767
PTD044 *AO2SL Analog output ch. 2 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting Set the internal value when -10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD042] to [Pr. PTD045]. Refer to [Pr. PTD042] for details.
-20000 -32768 to
32767
PTD045 *AO2SF Analog output ch. 2 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting Set the shift amount of the analog output signal for the scaling function. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD042] to [Pr. PTD045]. Refer to [Pr. PTD042] for details.
0 -32768 to
32767
PTD050 AO3OF Analog output ch. 3 - Offset Set the offset of analog output ch. 3. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD050] to [Pr. PTD053]. In this case, perform the following.
An alarm may occur when the difference in the setting of [Pr. PTD051 Analog output ch. 3 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting] and [Pr. PTD052 Analog output ch. 3 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting] is small. In this case, make the difference larger. An alarm may occur when the setting of [Pr. PTD053 Analog output ch. 3 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting] is large. In this case, set the value smaller.
0 [mV]
-10000 to
10000
PTD051 *AO3SH Analog output ch. 3 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting Set the internal value when +10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD050] to [Pr. PTD053]. Refer to [Pr. PTD050] for details.
20000 -32768 to
32767
PTD052 *AO3SL Analog output ch. 3 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting Set the internal value when -10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD050] to [Pr. PTD053]. Refer to [Pr. PTD050] for details.
-20000 -32768 to
32767
PTD053 *AO3SF Analog output ch. 3 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting Set the shift amount of the analog output signal for the scaling function. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD050] to [Pr. PTD053]. Refer to [Pr. PTD050] for details.
0 -32768 to
32767
PTD058 AO4OF Analog output ch. 4 - Offset Set the offset of analog output ch. 4. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD058] to [Pr. PTD061]. In this case, perform the following.
An alarm may occur when the difference in the setting of [Pr. PTD059 Analog output ch. 4 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting] and [Pr. PTD060 Analog output ch. 4 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting] is small. In this case, make the difference larger. An alarm may occur when the setting of [Pr. PTD061 Analog output ch. 4 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting] is large. In this case, set the value smaller.
0 [mV]
-10000 to
10000
PTD059 *AO4SH Analog output ch. 4 - Scaling function - Upper limit setting Set the internal value when +10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD058] to [Pr. PTD061]. Refer to [Pr. PTD058] for details.
20000 -32768 to
32767
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 83
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTD060 *AO4SL Analog output ch. 4 - Scaling function - Lower limit setting Set the internal value when -10 V is inputted. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD058] to [Pr. PTD061]. Refer to [Pr. PTD058] for details.
-20000 -32768 to
32767
PTD061 *AO4SF Analog output ch. 4 - Scaling function - Shift amount setting Set the shift amount of the analog output signal for the scaling function. [AL. 37 Parameter error] may occur depending on the setting combination of [Pr. PTD058] to [Pr. PTD061]. Refer to [Pr. PTD058] for details.
0 -32768 to
32767
PTD065 *AIAVF Analog input averaging - Signal selection
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Analog input average 1 - Signal selection Select the input signal for averaging. Enable the bit corresponding to each channel of the analog input to be averaged. When "0 is set to disable all the channels, "0" will be sent to the controller.
0h
Bit 3 2 1 0
Input signal Ch. 4 Ch. 3 Ch. 2 Ch. 1
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Set the weighting for each channel with [Pr. PTD67] to [Pr. PTD70].
_ _ x _ Analog input average 2 - Signal selection Select an input to be used. Enable the bit corresponding to each channel of the analog input to be averaged. When "0 is set to disable all the channels, "0" will be sent to the controller.
0h
Bit 3 2 1 0
Input signal Ch. 4 Ch. 3 Ch. 2 Ch. 1
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Set the weighting for each channel with [Pr. PTD71] to [Pr. PTD74].
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PTD067 *AIAV1C1 Analog input average 1 - Ch. 1 weighting Set the weighting for channel 1.
1 1 to
10000
PTD068 *AIAV1C2 Analog input average 1 - Ch. 2 weighting Set the weighting for channel 2.
1 1 to
10000
PTD069 *AIAV1C3 Analog input average 1 - Ch. 3 weighting Set the weighting for channel 3.
1 1 to
10000
PTD070 *AIAV1C4 Analog input average 1 - Ch. 4 weighting Set the weighting for channel 4.
1 1 to
10000
PTD071 *AIAV2C1 Analog input average 2 - Ch. 1 weighting Set the weighting for channel 1.
1 1 to
10000
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 84
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTD072 *AIAV2C2 Analog input average 2 - Ch. 2 weighting Set the weighting for channel 2.
1 1 to
10000
PTD073 *AIAV2C3 Analog input average 2 - Ch. 3 weighting Set the weighting for channel 3.
1 1 to
10000
PTD074 *AIAV2C4 Analog input average 2 - Ch. 4 weighting Set the weighting for channel 4.
1 1 to
10000
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 85
(5) MR-MT2400 encoder I/F module
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTE009 **ENCA Ch. A function selection Select enable/disable and a polarity for Ch. A function.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity of the encoder. 0: Encoder pulses increase when the encoder moves
in a positive direction. 1: Encoder pulses increase when the encoder moves
in a negative direction.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ Enable/disable ch. A selection Enable/disable ch. A. 0: Disable (disuse) 1: Enable (use)
0h
PTE037 **SECA1 SSI - Ch. A function setting 1 Set the communication data rate for ch. A when SSI is connected.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Communication data rate setting Set the communication data rate when SSI is connected. 0: 100 kbps 1: 200 kbps
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ Encoder data conversion waiting time setting Set the data communication conversion time of the encoder. 0: T (Communication data rate setting cycle)/2 1: 0.5 s 2: 1 s 3: 1.5 s 4: 2 s 5: 4 s 6: 8 s 7: 10 s
0h
x _ _ _ Code conversion function setting Set the code conversion function of the encoder data. 0: No conversion 1: Binary code output 2: Gray code Binary Conversion
0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 86
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTE038 **SECA2 SSI - Ch. A function setting 2 Set basic information of ch. A encoder when SSI is selected.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ x x Effective data length setting Set the effective data length of the encoder. A value of 20h or over will be fixed to 20h. Set the effective data length converted to hexadecimal value. For example, set "0Ch" when the effective data length is 12 bits. Set "19h" when the effective data length is 25 bits. Setting range: 0h to 2Fh
0h
x x _ _ Bit shift amount setting Set a bit shift amount from the start of the encoder data. Setting range: 0h to 1Fh
0h
PTE039 **SECA3 SSI - Ch. A function setting 3 Set multi-turn data of ch. A when SSI is selected.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ x x Multi-turn data - Data length Set the data length of the multi-turn data. A value of 20h or over will be fixed to 20h. Setting range: 0h to 2Fh
0h
x x _ _ Multi-turn data - Start bit position setting Set the start bit position of the multi-turn data. Setting range: 0h to 1Fh
0h
PTE040 **SECA4 SSI - Ch. A function setting 4 Set single-turn data of ch. A when SSI is selected.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ x x Single-turn data - Data length setting Set the data length of the single-turn data. A value of 20h or over will be fixed to 20h. Setting range: 0h to 2Fh
0h
x x _ _ Single-turn data - Start bit position setting Set the start bit position of the single-turn data. Setting range: 0h to 1Fh
0h
PTE041 **SECA5 SSI - Ch. A function setting 5 Set the status data of ch. A when SSI is selected.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ x x Status data - Data length setting Set the data length of the status data. A value of 20h or over will be fixed to 20h. Setting range: 0h to 2Fh
0h
x x _ _ Status data - Start bit position setting Set the start bit position of the status data. Setting range: 0h to 1Fh
0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 87
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTE042 **SECA6 SSI - Ch. A function setting 6 Set the error check method of ch. A when SSI is selected.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x For manufacturer setting 0h
_ _ x _ Status data - Check function setting Select enable/disable of alarm detection with status data. 0: Disable alarm detection with status data 1: Enable alarm detection with status data.
When "1" is set, also set " _ x_ _" of [Pr. PTE042].
0h
_ x _ _ Status data - Check polarity setting Select a condition for alarm detection with status data. 0: [AL. 20.2] occurs when the logical sum of the status
data is "1". 1: [AL. 20.2] occurs when the logical multiply of the
status data is "0".
0h
x _ _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
PTE043 **SDPLA Ch. A position variation error threshold - Lower Set the threshold (lower 16 bits) for detecting position variation error of ch. A when SSI is selected. Ch. A position variation error threshold [pulse] = Setting value of [Pr. PTE044] 65536 + the setting value of [Pr. PTE043] [AL. 20.5] will occur when the position variation within the data update cycle exceeds the position variation error threshold. Note that ch. A position variation error detection will be disabled in the following cases:
Both [Pr. PTE043] and [Pr. PTE044] are set to "0". The threshold for the position variation error is equal to or larger than "2^(Multi- turn data length + Single-turn data length - 1)". [Pr. PTE037] = "0 _ _ _" (code conversion function setting: non-conversion)
[Precautions] When using this function, set the threshold for the position variation error smaller than "2^(Multi-turn data length + Single-turn data length - 1)". When the position variation within the data update cycle is equal to or larger than "2^(Multi-turn data length + Single-turn data length - 1)", the alarm may not be detected. When the data update cycle is doubled, the position variation within the data update cycle will be doubled. Set the parameter according to the data update cycle. When the position variation error threshold is small, an error is more likely to be detected. However, an error caused by external factor such as noise is also more likely to be detected. When the position variation error threshold is large, an error is less likely to be detected. However, an error caused by external factor such as noise is also less likely to be detected. Set the parameter according to the system and environment.
0000h [pulse]
0000h to
FFFFh
PTE044 **SDPHA Ch. A position variation error threshold - Upper Set the threshold (upper 16 bits) for detecting position variation error of ch. A when SSI is selected. Set this parameter together with [Pr. PTE043].
0000h [pulse]
0000h to
7FFFh
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 88
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTE065 **ENCB Ch. B function selection Select enable/disable and a polarity for Ch. B function.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity of the encoder. 0: Encoder pulse increases with the movement in the
positive direction (CCW) 1: Encoder pulse increases with the movement in the
negative direction (CW)
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ Enable/disable ch. B selection Enable/disable ch. B. 0: Disable (disuse) 1: Enable (use)
0h
PTE093 **SECB1 SSI - Ch. B function setting 1 Set the communication data rate for ch. B when SSI is connected.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Communication data rate setting Set the communication data rate when SSI is connected. 0: 100 kbps 1: 200 kbps
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ Encoder data conversion waiting time setting Set the data communication conversion time of the encoder. 0: T (Communication data rate setting cycle)/2 1: 0.5 s 2: 1 s 3: 1.5 s 4: 2 s 5: 4 s 6: 8 s 7: 10 s
0h
x _ _ _ Code conversion function setting Set the code conversion function of the encoder data. 0: No conversion 1: Binary code output 2: Gray code Binary Conversion
0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 89
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTE094 **SECB2 SSI - Ch. B function setting 2 Set basic information of ch. B encoder when SSI is selected.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ x x Effective data length setting Set the effective data length of the encoder. A value of 20h or over will be fixed to 20h. Set the effective data length converted to hexadecimal value. For example, set "0Ch" when the effective data length is 12 bits. Set "19h" when the effective data length is 25 bits. Setting range: 0h to 2Fh
0h
x x _ _ Bit shift amount setting Set a bit shift amount from the start of the encoder data. Setting range: 0h to 1Fh
0h
PTE095 **SECB3 SSI - Ch. B function setting 3 Set multi-turn data of ch. B when SSI is selected.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ x x Multi-turn data - Data length Set the data length of the multi-turn data. A value of 20h or over will be fixed to 20h. Setting range: 0h to 2Fh
0h
x x _ _ Multi-turn data - Start bit position setting Set the start bit position of the multi-turn data. Setting range: 0h to 1Fh
0h
PTE096 **SECB4 SSI - Ch. B function setting 4 Set single-turn data of ch. B when SSI is selected.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ x x Single-turn data - Data length setting Set the data length of the single-turn data. A value of 20h or over will be fixed to 20h. Setting range: 0h to 2Fh
0h
x x _ _ Single-turn data - Start bit position setting Set the start bit position of the single-turn data. Setting range: 0h to 1Fh
0h
PTE097 **SECB5 SSI - Ch. B function setting 5 Set the status data of ch. B when SSI is selected.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ x x Status data - Data length setting Set the data length of the status data. A value of 20h or over will be fixed to 20h. Setting range: 0h to 2Fh
0h
x x _ _ Status data - Start bit position setting Set the start bit position of the status data. Setting range: 0h to 1Fh
0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 90
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PTE098 **SECB6 SSI - Ch. B function setting 6 Set the error check method of ch. B when SSI is selected.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x For manufacturer setting 0h
_ _ x _ Status data - Check function setting Select enable/disable of alarm detection with status data. 0: Disable alarm detection with status data 1: Enable alarm detection with status data.
When "1" is set, also set " _ x_ _" of [Pr. PTE098].
0h
_ x _ _ Status data - Check polarity setting Select a condition for alarm detection with status data. 0: [AL. 71.2] occurs when the logical sum of the status
data is "1". 1: [AL. 71.2] occurs when the logical multiply of the
status data is "0".
0h
x _ _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
PTE099 **SDPLB Ch. B position variation error threshold - Lower Set the threshold (lower 16 bits) for detecting position variation error of ch. B when SSI is selected. Ch. B position variation error threshold [pulse] = Setting value of [Pr. PTE100] 65536 + the setting value of [Pr. PTE099] [AL. 71.5] will occur when the position variation within the data update cycle exceeds the position variation error threshold. Note that ch. B position variation error detection will be disabled in the following cases:
Both [Pr. PTE099] and [Pr. PTE100] are set to "0". The threshold for the position variation error is equal to or larger than "2^(Multi- turn data length + Single-turn data length - 1)". [Pr. PTE093] = "0 _ _ _" (code conversion function setting: non-conversion)
[Precautions] When using this function, set the threshold for the position variation error smaller than "2^(Multi-turn data length + Single-turn data length - 1)". When the position variation within the data update cycle is equal to or larger than "2^(Multi-turn data length + Single-turn data length - 1)", the alarm may not be detected. When the data update cycle is doubled, the position variation within the data update cycle will be doubled. Set the parameter according to the data update cycle. When the position variation error threshold is small, an error is more likely to be detected. However, an error caused by external factor such as noise is also more likely to be detected. When the position variation error threshold is large, an error is less likely to be detected. However, an error caused by external factor such as noise is also less likely to be detected. Set the parameter according to the system and environment.
0000h [pulse]
0000h to
FFFFh
PTE100 **SDPHB Ch. B position variation error threshold - Upper Set the threshold (upper 16 bits) for detecting position variation error of ch. B when SSI is selected. Set this parameter together with [Pr. PTE099].
0000h [pulse]
0000h to
7FFFh
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 91
9.2 Axis mode
9.2.1 Parameter list
POINT
The parameter whose symbol is preceded by * is enabled with the following conditions: *: After setting the parameter, cycle the power or reset the controller. **: After setting the parameter, cycle the power.
(1) Basic setting parameters ([Pr. PA_ _ ])
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PA01
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PA02 0000h
PA03 0000h
PA04 0000h
PA05 0
PA06 *EGM Output-side electronic gear multiplication 1
PA07 *EGS Input-side electronic gear multiplication 1
PA08
For manufacturer setting 0
PA09 0
PA10 0
PA11 0
PA12 0
PA13 0000h
PA14 *POL Rotation direction selection 0
PA15 *PRL Number of pulses per revolution setting Lower 4000 [pulse/rev]
PA16 *PRH Number of pulses per revolution setting Upper 0 [10000 pulses/rev]
PA17 *DIL Input signal logic selection 0000h
PA18 *DOL Output signal logic selection 0000h
PA19
For manufacturer setting 000Bh
PA20 0000h
PA21 0000h
PA22 0000h
PA23 0000h
PA24 0000h
PA25 0000h
PA26 0000h
PA27 0000h
PA28 0000h
PA29 0000h
PA30 0000h
PA31 0000h
PA32 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 92
(2) Gain/filter setting parameters ([Pr. PB_ _ ])
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PB01 *DEL [AL. 35 I/O pulse frequency error] alarm level selection 0000h
PB02
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PB03 0
PB04 0
PB05 0
PB06 0
PB07 0
PB08 0
PB09 *TOP Motor maximum speed 6000 r/min
PB10 For manufacturer setting 0
PB11 RDT Virtual RD signal delay time 0 ms
PB12 CRT Clear signal output pulse width time 10 ms
PB13 For manufacturer setting 0
PB14 *PLSO Command pulse output form 0000h
PB15 For manufacturer setting 0
PB16 *IOP Input function selection 0000h
PB17 *FPI Feedback pulse input form 0000h
PB18 *BAS Motor rated speed 3000 r/min
PB19
For manufacturer setting 0
PB20 0
PB21 0
PB22 0
PB23 0000h
PB24 0000h
PB25 0000h
PB26 *LIS Home position return input setting 0000h
PB27
For manufacturer setting 0
PB28 0
PB29 0
PB30 0
PB31 0
PB32 0
PB33 0
PB34 0
PB35 0
PB36 0
PB37 0
PB38 0
PB39 0
PB40 0
PB41 0
PB42 0
PB43 0004h
PB44 0
PB45 0000h
PB46 0000h
PB47 0000h
PB48 0000h
PB49 0000h
PB50 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 93
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PB51
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PB52 0000h
PB53 0000h
PB54 0000h
PB55 0000h
PB56 0000h
PB57 0000h
PB58 0000h
PB59 0000h
PB60 0000h
PB61 0000h
PB62 0000h
PB63 0000h
PB64 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 94
(3) Extension setting parameters ([Pr. PC_ _ ])
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PC01
For manufacturer setting 0
PC02 0
PC03 0000h
PC04 0000h
PC05 0000h
PC06 0000h
PC07 0
PC08 0
PC09 0000h
PC10 0000h
PC11 0
PC12 0
PC13 0
PC14 0
PC15 0
PC16 0000h
PC17 0000h
PC18 0000h
PC19 0000h
PC20 0000h
PC21 0000h
PC22 0000h
PC23 0000h
PC24 0000h
PC25 0000h
PC26 0000h
PC27 0000h
PC28 0000h
PC29 0000h
PC30 0000h
PC31 0000h
PC32 0000h
PC33 *HDI1 Head module DI1 (CN2-13) setting 0000h
PC34 *HDI2 Head module DI2 (CN2-1) setting 0000h
PC35 *HDI3 Head module DI3 (CN2-14) setting 0000h
PC36 *HDI4 Head module DI4 (CN2-2) setting 0000h
PC37 *HDI5 Head module DI5 (CN2-15) setting 0000h
PC38 *HDI6 Head module DI6 (CN2-3) setting 0000h
PC39 *HDI7 Head module DI7 (CN2-16) setting 0000h
PC40 *HDI8 Head module DI8 (CN2-4) setting 0000h
PC41 *HDI9 Head module DI9 (CN2-17) setting 0000h
PC42 *HDI10 Head module DI10 (CN2-5) setting 0000h
PC43 *HDI11 Head module DI11 (CN2-18) setting 0000h
PC44 *HDI12 Head module DI12 (CN2-6) setting 0000h
PC45
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PC46 0003h
PC47 *HDO1 Head module DO1 (CN2-20) setting 0000h
PC48 *HDO2 Head module DO2 (CN2-8) setting 0000h
PC49 *COP2 Function selection C-2 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 95
No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit
PC50
For manufacturer setting 0000h
PC51 0000h
PC52 0000h
PC53 0000h
PC54 0000h
PC55 0000h
PC56 0000h
PC57 0000h
PC58 0000h
PC59 0000h
PC60 0000h
PC61 0000h
PC62 0000h
PC63 0000h
PC64 0000h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 96
9.2.2 Detailed list of parameters
POINT
Set a value to each "x" in the "Setting digit" columns.
(1) Basic setting parameters ([Pr. PA_ _ ])
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PA06 *EGM Output-side electronic gear multiplication Set an electronic gear multiplication for the output side. 1: 1 2: 1/2 3: 1/4 4: 1/8 When using the electronic gear in axis mode, the maximum frequency of the pulse output is determined by the settings of [Pr. PA06], [Pr. PA07] and [Pr. PB01]. Refer to the following table for details.
1 1 to 4
Output-side electronic
gear multiplication
[AL. 35 I/O pulse frequency error] alarm
level selection
Maximum frequency of pulse output (when electronic gear is used)
A-phase/B- phase pulse
train (multiplied by four)
Forward/reverse rotation pulse
train
Signed pulse train
1/2
[Pr. PA06]: 2
[Pr. PA07]: 1
Differential driver output [Pr. PB01]: _ _ _ 0
2 Mpulses/s 1 Mpulse/s 1 Mpulse/s
Open-collector output [Pr. PB01]: _ _ _ 1
200 kpulses/s 50 kpulses/s 50 kpulses/s
1/4
[Pr. PA06]: 3
[Pr. PA07]: 1
Differential driver output [Pr. PB01]: _ _ _ 0
1 Mpulse/s 500 kpulses/s 500 kpulses/s
Open-collector output [Pr. PB01]: _ _ _ 1
200 kpulses/s 50 kpulses/s 50 kpulses/s
1/8
[Pr. PA06]: 4
[Pr. PA07]: 1
Differential driver output [Pr. PB01]: _ _ _ 0
500 kpulses/s 200 kpulses/s 200 kpulses/s
Open-collector output [Pr. PB01]: _ _ _ 1
200 kpulses/s 50 kpulses/s 50 kpulses/s
PA07 *EGS Input-side electronic gear multiplication Set the multiplication of the electronic gear and feedback counter in the input side. 1: Reciprocal of the output-side electronic gear multiplication 2: 1 When using the electronic gear in axis mode, the maximum frequency of the pulse output is determined by the settings of [Pr. PA06], [Pr. PA07] and [Pr. PB01]. Refer to [Pr. PA06] for details.
1 1 to 2
PA14 *POL Rotation direction selection Select the rotation direction of command pulse output.
0 0 to 1
Setting digit
Motor rotation direction
When current position increase is commanded
When current position decrease is commanded
0 CW (forward rotation pulse output)
CCW (reverse rotation pulse output)
1 CCW (reverse rotation pulse output)
CW (forward rotation pulse output)
The actual rotation direction of the motor (CW/CCW) depends on the combination of the general pulse train driver setting.
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 97
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PA15 *PRL Number of pulses per revolution setting Lower Set the number of command pulses per motor revolution. Set the lower four digits of the number of pulses per revolution in decimal numbers in this parameter.
4000 [pulse/rev]
0 to
9999
PA16 *PRH Number of pulses per revolution setting Upper Set the number of command pulses per motor revolution. Set the higher four digits of the number of pulses per revolution in decimal numbers in this parameter.
0 [10000
pulses/rev]
0 to
9999
PA17 *DIL Input signal logic selection Select a logic for the input signal.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Bit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x _ _ _ x Bit 0: ALM (Malfunction) 0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting
_ x _ _ Bit 2: RD (Ready) 0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic
x _ _ _ Bit 3: INP (In-position) 0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic
_ _ x _ _ _ _ x Bit 4: FLS (Upper stroke limit) 0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic
0h
_ _ x _ Bit 5: RLS (Lower stroke limit) 0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic
_ x _ _ Bit 6: DOG (Proximity dog) 0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic
x _ _ _ For manufacturer setting
_ x _ _ _ _ _ x For manufacturer setting 0h
_ _ x _
_ x _ _
x _ _ _
x _ _ _ _ _ _ x Bit C: PG (zero-point signal) 0: Positive logic 1: Negative logic This parameter setting is available when connecting with head modules with software version A1 or later.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting
_ x _ _
x _ _ _
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 98
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PA18 *DOL Output signal logic selection Select a logic for the output signal.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Bit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x _ _ _ x Bit 0: SON (Servo-on) 0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic
0h
_ _ x _ Bit 1: CR (Clear) 0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic
_ x _ _ Bit 2: RES (Reset) 0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic
x _ _ _ For manufacturer setting
_ _ x _ _ _ _ x For manufacturer setting 0h
_ _ x _
_ x _ _
x _ _ _
_ x _ _ _ _ _ x For manufacturer setting 0h
_ _ x _
_ x _ _
x _ _ _
x _ _ _ _ _ _ x For manufacturer setting 0h
_ _ x _
_ x _ _
x _ _ _
(2) Gain/filter setting parameters ([Pr. PB_ _ ])
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PB01 *DEL [AL. 35 I/O pulse frequency error] alarm level selection Select the alarm level for [AL. 35 I/O pulse frequency error].
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x [AL. 35 I/O pulse frequency error] alarm level selection 0: Differential line driver output alarm level (1.5 times
of the maximum frequency) Note that when "A-phase/B-phase pulse train (_ _ 2 _)" is set with [Pr. PB14], a value of A-phase/B- phase pulse multiplied by four is applied.
1: Open-collector output alarm level (1.5 times of the maximum frequency)
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
When using the electronic gear in axis mode, the maximum frequency of the pulse output is determined by the settings of [Pr. PA06], [Pr. PA07] and [Pr. PB01]. Refer to [Pr. PA06] for details.
PB09 *TOP Motor maximum speed Set the maximum speed of the motor to be used.
6000 [r/min]
20 to
10000
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 99
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PB11 RDT Virtual RD signal delay time Set the delay time until the virtual RD signal turns on after the servo-on output turns on.
0 [ms]
0 to
1000
PB12 CRT Clear signal output pulse width time Set the minimum time for the clear output to be on. 1 ms is set when "0" is set.
10 [ms]
0 to
100
PB14 *PLSO Command pulse output form Select the command pulse signal output form.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x For manufacturer setting 0h
_ _ x _ Command pulse output form 0: Forward/reverse rotation pulse train 1: Signed pulse train 2: A-phase/B-phase pulse train (The pulse I/O module
outputs pulses after multiplying by four.)
0h
_ x _ _ Pulse train logic selection 0: Positive logic 1: Negative logic
0h
x _ _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
Setting value
Pulse train form Forward rotation
command Reverse rotation
command
0000h
Forward/ reverse rotation
pulse train CCW
CW
0010h Positive
logic
Signed pulse train LH
CW
CCW
0020h
A-phase/ B-phase
pulse train
CW
CCW
0100h
Forward/ reverse rotation
pulse train CCW
CW
0110h Negative
logic
Signed pulse train
CW
L HCCW
0120h
A-phase/ B-phase
pulse train
CW
CCW
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 100
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PB16 *IOP Input function selection Select an input function.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x ALM (Malfunction) input setting 0: Disable the alarm detection 1: Enable the alarm detection
0h
_ _ x _ RD (Ready) input setting 0: Disuse (Use the virtual RD signal.) 1: Use (Use the signal from the connected module.) The virtual RD signal is created in the module after the servo-on command is received.
0h
Virtual RD Determination condition
On When the time set in [Pr. PB11] has elapsed after servo-on
Off Servo-off
_ x _ _ INP (In-position) input setting 0: Disuse (Use the virtual INP signal.) 1: Use (Use the signal from the connected module.) The virtual INP signal is created in the module when the command frequency is equal to "0".
0h
Virtual INP Determination condition
On When the command frequency is equal to "0"
Off When the command frequency is not equal to "0"
x _ _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
PB17 *FPI Feedback pulse input form Select the input format of the feedback pulse input signal.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Feedback pulse filter selection 0: 0.02 s 1: 0.04 s 2: 0.08 s 3: 0.16 s 4: 0.32 s 5: 0.64 s
0h
_ _ x _ Pulse train logic selection 0: Positive logic 1: Negative logic
0h
_ x _ _ Pulse train input form 0: Forward/reverse rotation pulse train 1: Signed pulse train 2: A-phase/B-phase pulse train (The pulse I/O module
imports input pulses after multiplying by four.)
0h
x _ _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 101
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PB18 *BAS Motor rated speed Set the rated speed of the motor to be used. When the rated speed of the motor is unknown, set a value equal to or less than [Pr. PB09 Motor maximum speed].
3000 [r/min]
20 to
10000
PB26 *LIS Home position return input setting Set the function of the input signal at home position return.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Operation edge selection 0: Falling edge 1: Rising edge This parameter setting is available when connecting with head modules with software version A1 or later.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 102
(3) Extension setting parameters ([Pr. PC_ _ ])
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PC33 *HDI1 Head module DI1 (CN2-13) setting Set a function for the head module input signal DI1 (CN2-13). This parameter is enabled only for the first axis of one block. The setting is not valid for the other axes.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PC34 *HDI2 Head module DI2 (CN2-1) setting Set a function for the head module input signal DI2 (CN2-1). This parameter is enabled only for the first axis of one block. The setting is not valid for the other axes.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PC35 *HDI3 Head module DI3 (CN2-14) setting Set a function for the head module input signal DI3 (CN2-14). This parameter is enabled only for the first axis of one block. The setting is not valid for the other axes.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PC36 *HDI4 Head module DI4 (CN2-2) setting Set a function for the head module input signal DI4 (CN2-2). This parameter is enabled only for the first axis of one block. The setting is not valid for the other axes.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 103
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PC37 *HDI5 Head module DI5 (CN2-15) setting Set a function for the head module input signal DI5 (CN2-15). This parameter is enabled only for the first axis of one block. The setting is not valid for the other axes.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PC38 *HDI6 Head module DI6 (CN2-3) setting Set a function for the head module input signal DI6 (CN2-3). This parameter is enabled only for the first axis of one block. The setting is not valid for the other axes.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PC39 *HDI7 Head module DI7 (CN2-16) setting Set a function for the head module input signal DI7 (CN2-16). This parameter is enabled only for the first axis of one block. The setting is not valid for the other axes.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PC40 *HDI8 Head module DI8 (CN2-4) setting Set a function for the head module input signal DI8 (CN2-4). This parameter is enabled only for the first axis of one block. The setting is not valid for the other axes.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 104
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PC41 *HDI9 Head module DI9 (CN2-17) setting Set a function for the head module input signal DI9 (CN2-17). This parameter is enabled only for the first axis of one block. The setting is not valid for the other axes.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PC42 *HDI10 Head module DI10 (CN2-5) setting Set a function for the head module input signal DI10 (CN2-5). This parameter is enabled only for the first axis of one block. The setting is not valid for the other axes.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PC43 *HDI11 Head module DI11 (CN2-18) setting Set a function for the head module input signal DI11 (CN2-18). This parameter is enabled only for the first axis of one block. The setting is not valid for the other axes.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PC44 *HDI12 Head module DI12 (CN2-6) setting Set a function for the head module input signal DI12 (CN2-6). This parameter is enabled only for the first axis of one block. The setting is not valid for the other axes.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the input signal. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 105
No. Symbol Name and function Initial value
[Unit] Setting range
PC47 *HDO1 Head module DO1 (CN2-20) setting Set a function for the head module output signal DO1 (CN2-20). This parameter is enabled only for the first axis of one block. The setting is not valid for the other axes.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PC48 *HDO2 Head module DO2 (CN2-8) setting Set a function for the head module output signal DO2 (CN2-8). This parameter is enabled only for the first axis of one block. The setting is not valid for the other axes.
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x Polarity selection Select a polarity for the digital output. 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity
0h
_ _ x _ Output CLEAR/HOLD function selection Set the output status of the digital output signal for a communication shut-off. 0: CLEAR
The digital output signal will be in the initial status when the communication is shut off.
1: HOLD The previous digital output signal status will be held even when the communication is shut off.
0h
_ x _ _ For manufacturer setting 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
PC49 *COP2 Function selection C-2 Select a detection method for [AL. 10.3].
Refer to the Name and function column.
Setting digit Explanation Initial value
_ _ _ x [AL. 10.3] detection selection Select enabled/disabled for detecting [AL. 10.3]. 0: Enabled 1: Disabled Select "1" when not using the digital output of the head module.
0h
_ _ x _ For manufacturer setting 0h
_ x _ _ 0h
x _ _ _ 0h
9. PARAMETERS
9 - 106
MEMO
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 1
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
POINT
An alarm No. will not be shown on the module LED. Check the alarm No. of the sensing module by starting MELSOFT MR Configurator2 via MELSOFT MT Works2.
[AL. 37 Parameter error] and warnings are not recorded in the alarm history.
The symbols in the target column mean as follows. [MT2010]: MR-MT2010 [MT2100]: MR-MT2100 [MT2200]: MR-MT2200 [MT2300]: MR-MT2300 [MT2400]: MR-MT2400
When an error occurs during operation, the corresponding alarm or warning is displayed on the status display LED. If an alarm is displayed, refer to section 10.4 and take the appropriate action. If any warning occurs, refer to section 10.5 and take the appropriate action. 10.1 Explanations of the lists
(1) No./Name/Detail No./Detail name Indicates the alarm or warning No., name, detail No., and detail name.
(2) Alarm deactivation
After the alarm cause has been removed, the alarm can be deactivated in any of the methods marked in the alarm deactivation column. Warnings are automatically canceled after the cause of occurrence is removed. Alarms are deactivated by alarm reset, CPU reset, or power cycling.
Alarm deactivation Explanation
Alarm reset 1. Error reset command from the controller 2. Click the "Occurred Alarm Reset" in the "Alarm Display" window of MR
Configurator2.
CPU reset Reset the controller.
Cycling the power Cycle the power.
(3) Stop method
This indicates a module to be stopped when an alarm occurs. Each module: Only module with an alarm will stop. All modules: All modules will stop.
(4) Target module
This indicates a module which detects an alarm. The alarm occurs on the target module with .
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 2
10.2 Alarm list
No. Name Detail No.
Detail name
Alarm deactivation
Stop method
Target module
Alarm reset
CPU reset
Cycling the
power
MR- MT2010
MR- MT2100
MR- MT2200
MR- MT2300
MR- MT2400
A la
rm
10 Undervoltage
10.1 Voltage drop in the control circuit power
All
modules
10.3 Head module
Voltage drop in the external input power supply
All
modules
10.4 Analog I/O module
Voltage drop in the external input power supply
Each unit
11 Switch setting
error
11.1 Rotary switch setting error All
modules
11.2 Axis mode setting error
All modules
12 Memory error
1 (RAM)
12.1 RAM error 1 All
modules
12.2 RAM error 2
All modules
12.3 RAM error 3
All modules
12.4 RAM error 4
All modules
13 Clock error
13.1 Clock error 1 All
modules
13.2 Clock error 2
All modules
14 Control
process error
14.1 Control process error 1 All
modules
14.2 Control process error 2
All modules
14.3 Control process error 3
All modules
14.7 Control process error 7
All modules
14.C Control process error 12
All modules
15 Memory error 2 (EEP-ROM)
15.1 EEP-ROM error at power on All
modules
15.2
EEP-ROM error during operation
All
modules
17 Board error
17.4 Board error 4 All
modules
17.A Board error 10
All modules
19 Memory error
3 (Flash-ROM)
19.1 Flash-ROM error 1 All
modules
19.2 Flash-ROM error 2
All modules
1A
Incorrect combination of
extension modules
1A.1 Abnormal number of extension modules connected
All
modules
1A.2
Abnormal number of encoder I/F modules connected
All
modules
1B Driver error
1B.1 Driver error 1 Each unit
1B.2 Driver error 2 Each unit
1E
Encoder I/F module - Initial communication
error 2
1E.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A encoder malfunction
Each unit
1E.2 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B encoder malfunction
Each unit
1F
Encoder I/F module - Initial communication
error 3
1F.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A encoder not supported
Each unit
1F.2 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B encoder not supported
Each unit
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 3
No. Name Detail No.
Detail name
Alarm deactivation
Stop method
Target module
Alarm reset
CPU reset
Cycling the
power
MR- MT2010
MR- MT2100
MR- MT2200
MR- MT2300
MR- MT2400
A la
rm
20
Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication error 1
20.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication - Receive data error 1
Each unit
20.2 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication - Receive data error 2
Each unit
20.3 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication - Receive data error 3
Each unit
20.5 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication - Transmission data error 1
Each unit
20.6 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication - Transmission data error 2
Each unit
20.7 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication - Transmission data error 3
Each unit
21
Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication error 2
21.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Data error 1
Each unit
21.2
Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Data update error
Each unit
21.3
Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Data waveform error
Each unit
21.4
Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Non-signal error
Each unit
21.5
Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Hardware error 1
Each unit
21.6
Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Hardware error 2
Each unit
28
Encoder I/F module -
Linear encoder error 2
28.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder environmental error
Each unit
28.2 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder environmental error
Each unit
2A
Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder
error 1
2A.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-1
Each unit
2A.2
Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-2
Each unit
2A.3
Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-3
Each unit
2A.4
Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-4
Each unit
2A.5
Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-5
Each unit
2A.6
Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-6
Each unit
2A.7
Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-7
Each unit
2A.8
Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-8
Each unit
34 SSCNET
receive error 1
34.1 SSCNET receive data error
(Note 1)
All modules
34.2
SSCNET connector connection error
All
modules
34.3
SSCNET communication data error
Each unit
34.4
Hardware error signal detection
All
modules
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 4
No. Name Detail No.
Detail name
Alarm deactivation
Stop method
Target module
Alarm reset
CPU reset
Cycling the
power
MR- MT2010
MR- MT2100
MR- MT2200
MR- MT2300
MR- MT2400
A la
rm
35 I/O pulse frequency
error
35.1 Pulse I/O module - Ch. A Output pulse frequency error
Each unit
35.2 Pulse I/O module - Ch. B Output pulse frequency error
Each unit
35.3 Pulse I/O module - Ch. A Input pulse frequency error
Each unit
35.4 Pulse I/O module - Ch. B Input pulse frequency error
Each unit
36
SSCNET receive error 2
36.1 Continuous communication data error
Each unit
37 Parameter error
37.1 Parameter setting range error Each unit
37.2 Parameter combination error Each unit
71
Encoder I/F module - Ch. B
Normal communication
error 1
71.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Normal communication - Receive data error 1
Each unit
71.2 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Normal communication - Receive data error 2
Each unit
71.3
Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Normal communication - Receive data error 3
Each unit
71.5
Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Normal communication - Transmission data error 1
Each unit
71.6
Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Normal communication - Transmission data error 2
Each unit
71.7
Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Normal communication - Transmission data error 3
Each unit
72
Encoder I/F module - Ch. B
Normal communication
error 2
72.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Data error 1
Each unit
72.2
Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Data update error
Each unit
72.3
Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Data waveform error
Each unit
72.4
Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Non-signal error
Each unit
72.5
Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Hardware error 1
Each unit
72.6
Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Hardware error 2
Each unit
75 Extension
module error
75.1 Reset signal error Each unit
75.3 Output pulse error 1 Each unit
75.4 Output pulse error 2 Each unit
76
Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder
error 1
76.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-1
Each unit
76.2 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-2
Each unit
76.3 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-3
Each unit
76.4 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-4
Each unit
76.5 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-5
Each unit
76.6
Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-6
Each unit
76.7
Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-7
Each unit
76.8
Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-8
Each unit
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 5
No. Name Detail No.
Detail name
Alarm deactivation
Stop method
Target module
Alarm reset
CPU reset
Cycling the
power
MR- MT2010
MR- MT2100
MR- MT2200
MR- MT2300
MR- MT2400
A la
rm
8E Serial
communication error
8E.4 Serial communication command error
All
modules
8E.5 Serial communication data number error
All
modules
(Note 2) Watchdog (Note 2)
Watchdog
All modules
Note 1. In some controller communication status, the alarm factor may not be removed.
2. The alarm No. will not be shown. Check the status display LED of each sensing module.
10.3 Warning list
No. Name Detail No.
Detail name Stop
method
Target module
MR- MT2010
MR- MT2100
MR- MT2200
MR- MT2300
MR- MT2400
W ar
ni ng
E4 Parameter
warning E4.1 Parameter setting range error warning
E7 Controller forced
stop warning E7.1 Controller forced stop input warning
All modules
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 6
10.4 Remedies for alarms
CAUTION When an alarm occurs, eliminate its cause, ensure safety, and deactivate the alarm to restart operation. Otherwise, it may cause injury.
POINT
[AL. 37 Parameter error] is not recorded in the alarm history.
The alarm No. will not be shown on the module LED. Check the alarm No. of the sensing module by starting MELSOFT MR Configurator2 via MELSOFT MT Works2. The cause of alarm occurrence can also be checked using MELSOFT MR Configurator2. Alarm No.: 10 Name: Undervoltage
Alarm content The voltage of the control circuit power supply has dropped. The voltage in the external input power supply has dropped.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
10.1 Voltage drop in the control circuit power
(1) Connection of the control circuit power supply is incorrect.
Check the connection of the control circuit power supply.
It has a failure. Connect it correctly. [MT2010]
It has no failure. Check (2).
(2) The voltage of the control circuit power supply is low.
Check if the voltage of the control circuit power supply is lower than prescribed value. Prescribed value:
17 V DC
The voltage is the prescribed value or lower.
Review the voltage of the control circuit power supply.
The voltage is higher than the prescribed value.
Check (3).
(3) The power was cycled before the internal control circuit power supply stopped.
Check the power-on method if it has a problem.
It has a problem. Turn on the power supply again after making sure that the sensing module LED has turned off.
It has no problem. Check (4).
(4) An instantaneous power failure has occurred for more than 15 ms.
Check if the power has a problem.
It has a problem. Review the power.
10.3 Voltage drop in the external input power supply of the head module
(1) The external input power supply of the head module is not connected.
Check the usage of the digital output function of the head module.
The digital output function is not used.
Disable the detection of [AL. 10.3] with a parameter. Station mode:
[Pr. PTA032] Axis mode:
[Pr. PC49]
[MT2010]
The digital output function is used.
Check (2).
(2) Connection error is found in the external input power supply of the head module.
Check the connection of the external input power supply.
It has a failure. Connect it correctly.
It has no failure. Check (3).
(3) Low voltage in the external input power supply of the head module
Check if the voltage of the external input power supply is lower than prescribed value. Prescribed value:
16 V DC
The voltage is the prescribed value or lower.
Review the external input power supply.
The voltage is higher than the prescribed value.
Check (4).
(4) An instantaneous power failure has occurred.
Check if the power has a problem.
It has a problem. Review the power.
It has no problem. Check (5).
(5) The module is malfunctioning.
Replace the module and check again.
It is malfunctioning. Replace the head module.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 7
Alarm No.: 10 Name: Undervoltage
Alarm content The voltage of the control circuit power supply has dropped. The voltage in the external input power supply has dropped.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
10.4 Voltage drop in the external input power supply of the analog I/O module
(1) Connection error is found in the external input power supply of the analog I/O module.
Check the connection of the external input power supply.
It has a failure. Connect it correctly. [MT2300]
It has no failure. Check (2).
(2) Low voltage in the external input power supply of the analog I/O module
Check if the voltage of the external input power supply is lower than prescribed value. Prescribed value:
20 VDC
The voltage is the prescribed value or lower.
Review the external input power supply.
The voltage is higher than the prescribed value.
Check (3).
(3) An instantaneous power failure has occurred.
Check if the power has a problem.
It has a problem. Review the power.
It has no problem. Check (4).
(4) The module is malfunctioning.
Replace the module and check again.
It is malfunctioning. Replace the analog I/O module.
Alarm No.: 11 Name: Switch setting error
Alarm content The setting of the station number selection rotary switch of the head module is incorrect. The setting of the mode selection switch (SW1) of the pulse I/O module is incorrect.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
11.1 Rotary switch setting error
(1) The setting of the station number selection rotary switch of the head module is incorrect.
Check the number of modules connected and the setting of the rotary switch. For the axis mode, the setting of the last axis should be 64 or lower. For the station mode, the setting of the last station should be 64 or lower.
The setting is incorrect.
Set it correctly and cycle the power.
[MT2010]
The setting is correct.
Check (2).
(2) The module is malfunctioning.
Replace the module and check again.
It is malfunctioning. Replace the head module.
11.2 Axis mode setting error
(1) In the axis mode, an extension module other than the pulse I/O module has been connected.
Check if an extension module other than the pulse I/O module has been connected.
Connected Other than the pulse I/O module cannot be used in the axis mode. Use the station mode, or remove the module to use the axis mode.
[MT2100] [MT2200] [MT2300] [MT2400]
Not connected Check (2).
(2) The setting of the mode selection switch (SW1) of the pulse I/O module is incorrect.
Check the setting of the axis mode/station mode selection switch of the pulse I/O module.
The module is in the station mode.
Set the axis mode and cycle the power.
The module is in the axis mode.
Check (3).
(3) Five or more axes are set per one block in the axis mode.
Check the setting of the mode selection switch (SW1) of the pulse I/O module.
Five or more axes are set per one block.
Use four or less axes per one block.
Four or less axes are set per one block.
Replace the pulse I/O module.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 8
Alarm No.: 12 Name: Memory error 1 (RAM)
Alarm content A part (RAM) in the head module failed.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
12.1 RAM error 1 (1) A part in the head module failed.
Disconnect the cables except for the control circuit power supply, and then check the repeatability.
It is repeatable. Replace the head module.
[MT2010]
It is not repeatable. Check (2).
(2) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the power supply for noise.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
12.2 RAM error 2 Check it with the check method for [AL. 12.1].
12.3 RAM error 3
12.4 RAM error 4
Alarm No.: 13 Name: Clock error
Alarm content A part in the head module failed. An error occurred in the clock transmitted from the controller.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
13.1 Clock error 1 (1) A part in the head module failed.
Disconnect the cables except for the control circuit power supply, and then check the repeatability.
It is repeatable. Replace the head module.
[MT2010]
It is not repeatable. Check (2).
(2) An error occurred with the clock transmitted from the controller.
Check if the alarm occurs when you connect the sensing module to the controller.
It occurs. Replace the controller.
It does not occur. Check (3).
(3) The next module axis is malfunctioning.
Check if the next module axis is malfunctioning.
It is malfunctioning. Replace the module of the next axis.
It is not malfunctioning.
Check (4).
(4) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the power supply for noise. Check if the connector is shorted.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
13.2 Clock error 2 Check it with the check method for [AL. 13.1].
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 9
Alarm No.: 14 Name: Control process error
Alarm content The process did not complete within the specified time.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
14.1 Control process error 1
(1) The parameter setting is incorrect.
Check if the parameter setting is incorrect.
It is incorrect. Set it correctly. [MT2010]
It is correct. Check (2).
(2) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the power supply for noise. Check if the connector is shorted.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
It has no failure. Check (3).
(3) The head module is malfunctioning.
Replace the head module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the head module.
14.2 Control process error 2
(1) An error occurred in the synchronous signal transmitted from the controller.
Replace the controller, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the controller.
[MT2010]
It is repeatable. Check (2).
(2) The parameter setting is incorrect.
Check if the parameter setting is incorrect.
It is incorrect. Set it correctly.
It is correct. Check (3).
(3) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the power supply for noise. Check if the connector is shorted.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
It has no failure. Check (4).
(4) The head module is malfunctioning.
Replace the head module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the head module.
14.3 Control process error 3
Check it with the check method for [AL. 14.1].
14.7 Control process error 7
14.C Control process error 12
(1) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
[MT2010] [MT2100] [MT2200] [MT2300] [MT2400]
It has no failure. Check (2).
(2) The extension module is malfunctioning.
Remove the extension modules one by one, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the corresponding extension module.
It is repeatable. Check (3).
(3) The head module is malfunctioning.
Replace the head module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the head module.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 10
Alarm No.: 15 Name: Memory error 2 (EEP-ROM)
Alarm content A part (EEP-ROM) in the head module failed.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
15.1 EEP-ROM error at power on
(1) EEP-ROM is malfunctioning at power on.
Disconnect the cables except for the control circuit power supply, and then check the repeatability.
It is repeatable. Replace the head module.
[MT2010]
It is not repeatable. Check (2).
(2) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the power supply for noise. Check if the connector is shorted.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
It has no failure. Check (3).
(3) The number of write times exceeded 100,000.
Check if parameters have been changed very frequently.
They have been changed.
Replace the head module. Change the process to change parameters less frequently after replacement.
15.2 EEP-ROM error during operation
(1) EEP-ROM is malfunctioning during normal operation.
Check if the error occurs when you change parameters during normal operation.
It occurs. Replace the head module.
[MT2010]
It does not occur. Check (2).
(2) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the power supply for noise. Check if the connector is shorted.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
Alarm No.: 17 Name: Board error
Alarm content A part in the sensing module is malfunctioning.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
17.4 Board error 4 (1) Recognition signal of each module was not read properly.
Disconnect the cables except for the control circuit power supply, and then check the repeatability.
It is repeatable. Replace the module. [MT2010] [MT2100] [MT2200] [MT2300] [MT2400]
It is not repeatable. Check (2).
(2) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
17.A Board error 10 (1) The internal power supply circuit is malfunctioning.
Disconnect the cables except for the control circuit power supply, and then check the repeatability.
It is repeatable. Replace the module. [MT2100] [MT2200]
It is not repeatable. Check (2).
(2) The wiring of the control circuit power supply is incorrect.
Check the wiring of the control circuit power supply.
The wiring is incorrect.
Wire it correctly.
The wiring is correct. Check (3).
(3) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 11
Alarm No.: 19 Name: Memory error 3 (Flash-ROM)
Alarm content A part (Flash-ROM) in the head module failed.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
19.1 Flash-ROM error 1
(1) The Flash-ROM is malfunctioning.
Disconnect the cables except for the control circuit power supply, and then check the repeatability.
It is repeatable. Replace the head module.
[MT2010]
It is not repeatable. Check (2).
(2) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
19.2 Flash-ROM error 2
Check it with the check method for [AL. 19.1].
Alarm No.: 1A Name: Incorrect combination of extension modules
Alarm content The number of connected extension modules exceeded the specified number.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
1A.1 Abnormal number of extension modules connected
(1) The number of connected extension modules exceeded the maximum number.
Check if five or more extension modules have been connected.
Connected Connect four or less extension modules.
[MT2010] [MT2100] [MT2200] [MT2300] [MT2400]
Not connected Check (2).
(2) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
1A.2 Abnormal number of encoder I/F modules connected
(1) The number of connected encoder I/F modules exceeded the maximum number.
Check if three or more encoder I/F modules have been connected.
Connected Connect two or less encoder I/F modules.
[MT2400]
Not connected Check (2).
(2) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
Alarm No.: 1B Name: Driver error
Alarm content An error signal is outputted from a general-purpose pulse train driver.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
1B.1 Driver error 1 (1) ALM (Malfunction) is inputted from a general- purpose pulse train driver.
Check if the general- purpose pulse train driver is malfunctioning.
It has a failure. Clear the failure of the general-purpose pulse train driver.
[MT2200]
It has no failure. Check (2).
(2) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
1B.2 Driver error 2 (1) RD (Ready) of a general-purpose pulse train driver turns off while command pulses are outputted from the pulse I/O module.
Check RD (Ready) of the general-purpose pulse train driver.
RD (Ready) is off. Remove the cause that turns off RD (Ready) on the general-purpose pulse train driver side.
[MT2200]
RD (Ready) is on. Check (2).
(2) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 12
Alarm No.: 1E Name: Encoder I/F module - Initial communication error 2
Alarm content The encoder connected to the encoder I/F module is malfunctioning.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
1E.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A encoder malfunction
(1) The encoder connected to ch. A is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder connected to ch. A, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder.
[MT2400]
It is repeatable. Check (2).
(2) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, vibration, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
1E.2 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B encoder malfunction
(1) The encoder connected to ch. B is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder connected to ch. B, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder.
[MT2400]
It is repeatable. Check (2).
(2) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, vibration, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
Alarm No.: 1F Name: Encoder I/F module - Initial communication error 3
Alarm content The encoder connected to the encoder I/F module is not supported.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
1F.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A encoder not supported
(1) The connected encoder is not supported by ch. A of the encoder I/F module.
Check the model of the encoder connected to ch. A.
The encoder is not supported.
Replace it with a supported encoder.
[MT2400]
The encoder is compatible with the module.
Check (2).
(2) The encoder connected to ch. A is not supported by the software version of the sensing module.
Check the software version of the sensing module and if it supports the connected encoder.
It does not support. Replace it with the head module with software version which supports the connected encoder.
It supports. Check (3).
(3) The encoder connected to ch. A is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder connected to ch. A, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder.
It is repeatable. Replace the encoder I/F module.
1F.2 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B encoder not supported
(1) The connected encoder is not supported by ch. B of the encoder I/F module.
Check the model of the encoder connected to ch. B.
The encoder is not compatible with the module.
Replace it with a compatible encoder.
[MT2400]
The encoder is compatible with the module.
Check (2).
(2) The encoder connected to ch. B is not supported by the software version of the sensing module.
Check the software version of the sensing module and check if it is compatible with the connected encoder.
It does not support. Replace it with the head module with software version which supports the connected encoder.
It supports. Check (3).
(3) The encoder connected to ch. B is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder connected to ch. B, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder.
It is repeatable. Replace the encoder I/F module.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 13
Alarm No.: 20 Name: Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication error 1
Alarm content A communication error has occurred between the encoder connected to ch. A and the encoder I/F module.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
20.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication - Receive data error 1
(1) The encoder cable is malfunctioning.
Check if the encoder cable is disconnected or shorted.
It has a failure. Repair or replace the cable.
[MT2400]
It has no failure. Check (2).
(2) The external conductor of the encoder cable is not connected to an SHD pin of the connector.
Check if it is connected.
Not connected Connect it correctly.
Connected Check (3).
(3) The encoder I/F module is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder I/F module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder I/F module.
It is repeatable. Check (4).
(4) The encoder is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder connected to ch. A, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder.
It is repeatable. Check (5).
(5) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, vibration, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
20.2 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication - Receive data error 2
(1) The encoder cable is malfunctioning.
Check if the encoder cable is disconnected or shorted.
It has a failure. Repair or replace the cable.
[MT2400]
It has no failure. Check (2).
(2) The external conductor of the encoder cable is not connected to an SHD pin of the connector.
Check if it is connected.
Not connected Connect it correctly.
Connected Check (3).
(3) When an SSI- compatible encoder is used, error information is obtained from received status data.
Check the details of the error described in the specifications of the encoder used.
The error information corresponds to the details described in the specifications.
Remove the error cause.
The error information does not correspond to the details described in the specifications.
Check (4).
(4) The encoder I/F module is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder I/F module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder I/F module.
It is repeatable. Check (5).
(5) The encoder is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder connected to ch. A, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder.
It is repeatable. Check (6).
(6) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, vibration, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
20.3 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication - Receive data error 3
Check it with the check method for [AL. 20.1].
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 14
Alarm No.: 20 Name: Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication error 1
Alarm content A communication error has occurred between the encoder connected to ch. A and the encoder I/F module.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
20.5 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication - Transmission data error 1
(1) The encoder cable is malfunctioning.
Check if the encoder cable is disconnected or shorted.
It has a failure. Repair or replace the cable.
[MT2400]
It has no failure. Check (2).
(2) The external conductor of the encoder cable is not connected to an SHD pin of the connector.
Check if it is connected.
Not connected Connect it correctly.
Connected Check (3).
(3) The parameter setting is incorrect.
Check if a value smaller than its actual operation pattern is set in [Pr. PTE043] and [Pr. PTE044].
It is set. Set the parameters according to the actual operation pattern.
It is not set. Check (4).
(4) An excessive speed has occurred.
Check if an excessive speed has occurred in a machine where the encoder is installed.
It has not occurred. Remove the cause for the excessive speed.
It occurred. Check (5).
(5) The encoder I/F module is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder I/F module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder I/F module.
It is repeatable. Check (6).
(6) The encoder is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder connected to ch. A, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder.
It is repeatable. Check (7).
(7) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, vibration, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
20.6 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication - Transmission data error 2
Check it with the check method for [AL. 20.1].
20.7 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication - Transmission data error 3
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 15
Alarm No.: 21 Name: Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Normal communication error 2
Alarm content The encoder connected to ch. A detected an error signal.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
21.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Data error 1
(1) The external conductor of the encoder cable is not connected to an SHD pin of the connector.
Check if it is connected.
Not connected Connect it correctly. [MT2400]
Connected Check (2).
(2) The encoder is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder.
It is repeatable. Check (3).
(3) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, vibration, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
21.2 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Data update error
(1) The encoder is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder.
It is repeatable. Check (2).
(2) The external conductor of the encoder cable is not connected to an SHD pin of the connector.
Check if it is connected.
Not connected Connect it correctly.
Connected Check (3).
(3) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
21.3 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Data waveform error
Check it with the check method for [AL. 21.2].
21.4 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Non-signal error
(1) A signal of the encoder connected to ch. A has not been input.
Check if the encoder cable is connected correctly.
It has a failure. Review the wiring. [MT2400]
It has no failure. Check (2).
(2) The external conductor of the encoder cable is not connected to an SHD pin of the connector.
Check if it is connected.
Not connected Connect it correctly.
Connected Check (3).
(3) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
21.5 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Hardware error 1
Check it with the check method for [AL. 21.2].
21.6 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Hardware error 2
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 16
Alarm No.: 28 Name: Encoder I/F module - Linear encoder error 2
Alarm content The working environment of the encoder connected to the encoder I/F module is not normal.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
28.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder environmental error
(1) The ambient temperature of the linear encoder connected to ch. A is out of specifications.
Check the ambient temperature of the linear encoder connected to ch. A.
It is out of specifications.
Lower the temperature. Contact the linear encoder manufacturer.
[MT2400]
It is within specifications.
Check (2).
(2) The signal level of the linear encoder connected to ch. A has dropped.
Check the installation condition of the linear encoder connected to ch. A.
It has a failure. Install it correctly.
28.2 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder environmental error
(1) The ambient temperature of the linear encoder connected to ch. B is out of specifications.
Check the ambient temperature of the linear encoder connected to ch. B.
It is out of specifications.
Lower the temperature. Contact the linear encoder manufacturer.
It is within specifications.
Check (2).
(2) The signal level of the linear encoder connected to ch. B has dropped.
Check the installation condition of the linear encoder connected to ch. B.
It has a failure. Install it correctly.
Alarm No.: 2A Name: Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1
Alarm content An error was detected in the linear encoder connected to ch. A of the encoder I/F module. (The details vary depending on the linear encoder manufacturer.)
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
2A.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-1
(1) Installation error exists in the head of the linear encoder connected to ch. A.
Adjust the positions of the scale and head, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Use the linear encoder at the adjusted position.
[MT2400]
It is repeatable. Check (2).
(2) The external conductor of the encoder cable is not connected to an SHD pin of the connector.
Check if it is connected.
Not connected Connect it correctly.
Connected Check (3).
(3) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, vibration, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
It has no failure. Check (4).
(4) An alarm was detected in the linear encoder connected to ch. A.
Refer to the alarm detail list of the "Linear Encoder Instruction Manual".
Remove its cause described in the instruction manual.
Contact each encoder manufacturer for how to deal with it.
2A.2 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-2
Check it with the check method for [AL. 2A.1].
2A.3 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-3
2A.4 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-4
2A.5 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-5
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 17
Alarm No.: 2A Name: Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1
Alarm content An error was detected in the linear encoder connected to ch. A of the encoder I/F module. (The details vary depending on the linear encoder manufacturer.)
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
2A.6 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-6
Check it with the check method for [AL. 2A.1].
2A.7 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-7
2A.8 Encoder I/F module - Ch. A Linear encoder error 1-8
Alarm No.: 34 Name: SSCNET receive error 1
Alarm content An error occurred in SSCNET III/H communications. (continuous communication error with 3.5 ms interval)
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
34.1 SSCNET receive data error
(1) The SSCNET III cable is disconnected.
Check the SSCNET III cable connection.
Disconnected Turn off the control circuit power supply of the head module, and then connect the SSCNET III cable.
[MT2010]
Connected Check (2).
(2) The SSCNET III cable ends are dirty.
Wipe off the dirt from the cable ends, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Take measures to keep the cable ends clean.
It is repeatable. Check (3).
(3) The SSCNET III cable is broken or cut.
Check if the SSCNET III cable is malfunctioning.
It has a failure. Replace the SSCNET III cable.
It has no failure. Check (4).
(4) A vinyl tape is adhered to the SSCNET III cable, or the cable is in contact with a wire insulator containing migrating plasticizer.
Check if a vinyl tape is used. Check if the SSCNET III cable is in contact with other wires.
It is used. It is in contact.
Take countermeasures against its cause.
It is not used. It is not in contact.
Check (5).
(5) The head module is malfunctioning.
Replace the head module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the head module.
It is repeatable. Check (6).
(6) The previous or next axis module to the head module where the alarm has occurred is malfunctioning.
Replace the previous or next axis module to the head module where the alarm has occurred, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the module.
It is repeatable. Check (7).
(7) The controller is malfunctioning.
Replace the controller, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the controller.
It is repeatable. Check (8).
(8) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 18
Alarm No.: 34 Name: SSCNET receive error 1
Alarm content An error occurred in SSCNET III/H communications. (continuous communication error with 3.5 ms interval)
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
34.2 SSCNET connector connection error
Check it with the check method for [AL. 34.1].
34.3 SSCNET communication data error
34.4 Hardware error signal detection
Alarm No.: 35 Name: I/O pulse frequency error
Alarm content The pulse frequency to be input to the pulse I/O module is too high. The pulse frequency to be output from the pulse I/O module is too high.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
35.1 Pulse I/O module - Ch. A Output pulse frequency error
(1) The pulse frequency to be output from ch. A is high.
Check the pulse frequency to be output from the controller.
The output pulse frequency is high.
Review the pulse frequency to be output.
[MT2200]
The output pulse frequency is low.
Check (2).
(2) When using the electronic gear in axis mode, the pulse frequency to be output from Ch. A is high compared to the maximum frequency of the pulse output. [Pr. PA06], [Pr. PA07] and [Pr. PB01]
Check the output pulse frequency from the controller.
The output pulse frequency is high.
Review the frequency of the output pulse.
The output pulse frequency is low.
Check (3).
(3) The parameter setting is incorrect when the pulse I/O module is used in the axis mode.
Check the connection form of the pulse that is actually output and the setting value of [Pr. PB01].
They are not matched.
Change the setting according to the connection form of the pulse to be output.
They are matched. Check (4).
(4) The controller is malfunctioning.
Replace the controller, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the controller.
It is repeatable. Check (5).
(5) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 19
Alarm No.: 35 Name: I/O pulse frequency error
Alarm content The pulse frequency to be input to the pulse I/O module is too high. The pulse frequency to be output from the pulse I/O module is too high.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
35.2 Pulse I/O module - Ch. B Output pulse frequency error
(1) The pulse frequency to be output from ch. B is high.
Check the pulse frequency to be output from the controller.
The output pulse frequency is high.
Review the pulse frequency to be output.
[MT2200]
The output pulse frequency is low.
Check (2).
(2) When using electronic gear in axis mode, the pulse frequency to be output from Ch. B is high compared to the maximum frequency of the pulse output. [Pr. PA06], [Pr. PA07] and [Pr. PB01]
Check the output pulse frequency from the controller.
The output pulse frequency is high.
Review the frequency of the output pulse.
The output pulse frequency is low.
Check (3).
(3) The parameter setting is incorrect when the pulse I/O module is used in the axis mode.
Check the connection form of the pulse that is actually output and the setting value of [Pr. PB01].
They are not matched.
Change the setting according to the connection form of the pulse to be output.
They are matched. Check (4).
(4) The controller is malfunctioning.
Replace the controller, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the controller.
It is repeatable. Check (5).
(5) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
35.3 Pulse I/O module - Ch. A Input pulse frequency error
(1) The pulse frequency to be input to ch. A is high.
Check the pulse frequency to be input to ch. A.
The input pulse frequency is high.
Reduce the input pulse frequency.
[MT2200]
The input pulse frequency is low.
Check (2).
(2) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
35.4 Pulse I/O module - Ch. B Input pulse frequency error
(1) The pulse frequency to be input to ch. B is high.
Check the pulse frequency to be input to ch. B.
The input pulse frequency is high.
Reduce the input pulse frequency.
[MT2200]
The input pulse frequency is low.
Check (2).
(2) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 20
Alarm No.: 36 Name: SSCNET receive error 2
Alarm content An error occurred in SSCNET III/H communications. (intermittent communication error with about 70 ms interval)
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
36.1 Continuous communication data error
(1) The SSCNET III cable is disconnected.
Check the SSCNET III cable connection.
Disconnected Turn off the control circuit power supply of the head module, and then connect the SSCNET III cable.
[MT2010]
Connected Check (2).
(2) The SSCNET III cable ends are dirty.
Wipe off the dirt from the cable ends, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Take measures to keep the cable ends clean.
It is repeatable. Check (3).
(3) The SSCNET III cable is broken or cut.
Check if the SSCNET III cable is malfunctioning.
It has a failure. Replace the SSCNET III cable.
It has no failure. Check (4).
(4) A vinyl tape is adhered to the SSCNET III cable, or the cable is in contact with a wire insulator containing migrating plasticizer.
Check if a vinyl tape is used. Check if the SSCNET III cable is in contact with other wires.
It is used. It is in contact.
Take countermeasures against its cause.
It is not used. It is not in contact.
Check (5).
(5) The head module is malfunctioning.
Replace the head module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the head module.
It is repeatable. Check (6).
(6) The previous or next axis module to the head module where the alarm has occurred is malfunctioning.
Replace the previous or next axis module to the head module where the alarm has occurred, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the module.
It is repeatable. Check (7).
(7) The controller is malfunctioning.
Replace the controller, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the controller.
It is repeatable. Check (8).
(8) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 21
Alarm No.: 37 Name: Parameter error
Alarm content The parameter setting is incorrect.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
37.1 Parameter setting range error
(1) A parameter was set out of setting range.
Check the parameter error No. and setting value.
It is out of setting range.
Set it within the range.
[MT2010] [MT2100] [MT2200] [MT2300] [MT2400]
It is within the setting range.
Check (2).
(2) A parameter setting contradicts another.
Check the parameter error No. and setting value.
A setting value is incorrect.
Correct the setting value.
The setting value is correct.
Check (3).
(3) The parameter setting has changed due to a head module malfunction.
Replace the head module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the head module.
37.2 Parameter combination error
(1) A parameter setting contradicts another.
Check the parameter error No. and setting value.
A setting value is incorrect.
Correct the setting value.
Alarm No.: 71 Name: Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Initial communication error 1
Alarm content A communication error has occurred between the encoder connected to ch. B and the encoder I/F module.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
71.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Normal communication - Receive data error 1
(1) The encoder cable is malfunctioning.
Check if the encoder cable is disconnected or shorted.
It has a failure. Repair or replace the cable.
[MT2400]
It has no failure. Check (2).
(2) The external conductor of the encoder cable is not connected to an SHD pin of the connector.
Check if it is connected.
Not connected Connect it correctly.
Connected Check (3).
(3) The encoder I/F module is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder I/F module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder I/F module.
It is repeatable. Check (4).
(4) The encoder is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder connected to ch. B, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder.
It is repeatable. Check (5).
(5) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, vibration, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 22
Alarm No.: 71 Name: Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Initial communication error 1
Alarm content A communication error has occurred between the encoder connected to ch. B and the encoder I/F module.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
71.2 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Normal communication - Receive data error 2
(1) The encoder cable is malfunctioning.
Check if the encoder cable is disconnected or shorted.
It has a failure. Repair or replace the cable.
[MT2400]
It has no failure. Check (2).
(2) The external conductor of the encoder cable is not connected to an SHD pin of the connector.
Check if it is connected.
Not connected Connect it correctly.
Connected Check (3).
(3) When an SSI- compatible encoder is used, error information is obtained from received status data.
Check the details of the error described in the specifications of the encoder used.
The error information corresponds to the details described in the specifications.
Remove the error cause.
The error information does not correspond to the details described in the specifications.
Check (4).
(4) The encoder I/F module is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder I/F module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder I/F module.
It is repeatable. Check (5).
(5) The encoder is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder connected to ch. B, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder.
It is repeatable. Check (6).
(6) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, vibration, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
71.3 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Normal communication - Receive data error 3
Check it with the check method for [AL. 71.1].
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 23
Alarm No.: 71 Name: Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Initial communication error 1
Alarm content A communication error has occurred between the encoder connected to ch. B and the encoder I/F module.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
71.5 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Normal communication - Transmission data error 1
(1) The encoder cable is malfunctioning.
Check if the encoder cable is disconnected or shorted.
It has a failure. Repair or replace the cable.
[MT2400]
It has no failure. Check (2).
(2) The external conductor of the encoder cable is not connected to an SHD pin of the connector.
Check if it is connected.
Not connected Connect it correctly.
Connected Check (3).
(3) The parameter setting is incorrect.
Check if a value smaller than its actual operation pattern is set in [Pr. PTE099] or [Pr. PTE100].
It is set. Set the parameters according to the actual operation pattern.
It is not set. Check (4).
(4) An excessive speed has occurred.
Check if an excessive speed has occurred in a machine where the encoder is installed.
It does not occur. Remove the cause for the excessive speed.
It occurred. Check (5).
(5) The encoder I/F module is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder I/F module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder I/F module.
It is repeatable. Check (6).
(6) The encoder is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder connected to ch. B, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder.
It is repeatable. Check (7).
(7) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, vibration, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
71.6 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Normal communication - Transmission data error 2
Check it with the check method for [AL. 71.1].
71.7 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Normal communication - Transmission data error 3
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 24
Alarm No.: 72 Name: Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Normal communication error 2
Alarm content The encoder connected to ch. B detected an error signal.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
72.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Data error 1
(1) The external conductor of the encoder cable is not connected to an SHD pin of the connector.
Check if it is connected.
Not connected Connect it correctly. [MT2400]
Connected Check (2).
(2) The encoder is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder.
It is repeatable. Check (3).
(3) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, vibration, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
72.2 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Data update error
(1) The encoder is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the encoder.
It is repeatable. Check (2).
(2) The external conductor of the encoder cable is not connected to an SHD pin of the connector.
Check if it is connected.
Not connected Connect it correctly.
Connected Check (3).
(3) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
72.3 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Data waveform error
Check it with the check method for [AL. 21.2].
72.4 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Non-signal error
(1) A signal of the encoder connected to ch. B has not been input.
Check if the encoder cable is connected correctly.
It has a failure. Review the wiring. [MT2400]
It has no failure. Check (2).
(2) The external conductor of the encoder cable is not connected to an SHD pin of the connector.
Check if it is connected.
Not connected Connect it correctly.
Connected Check (3).
(3) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
72.5 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Hardware error 1
Check it with the check method for [AL. 72.2].
72.6 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Hardware error 2
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 25
Alarm No.: 75 Name: Extension module error
Alarm content An extension module is malfunctioning.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
75.1 Reset signal error
(1) A module is malfunctioning.
Replace the corresponding module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the module. [MT2100] [MT2200] [MT2300] [MT2400]
It is repeatable. Check (2).
(2) A connection error is found in the module.
Remove and connect the corresponding module, and then check the repeatability.
It is repeatable. Replace the module previous and next to the corresponding module.
It is not repeatable. Check (3).
(3) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
75.3 Output pulse error 1
(1) A module is malfunctioning.
Replace the corresponding module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the pulse I/O module.
[MT2200]
75.4 Output pulse error 2
(1) A module is malfunctioning.
Replace the corresponding module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the pulse I/O module.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 26
Alarm No.: 76 Name: Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1
Alarm content An error was detected in the linear encoder connected to ch. B of the encoder I/F module. (The details vary depending on the linear encoder manufacturer.)
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
76.1 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-1
(1) Installation error exists in the head of the linear encoder connected to ch. B.
Adjust the positions of the scale and head, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Use the linear encoder at the adjusted position.
[MT2400]
It is repeatable. Check (2).
(2) The external conductor of the encoder cable is not connected to an SHD pin of the connector.
Check if it is connected.
Not connected Connect it correctly.
Connected Check (3).
(3) Problem with the surrounding.
Check the noise, ambient temperature, vibration, etc.
It has a failure. Take countermeasures against its cause.
It has no failure. Check (4).
(4) An alarm was detected in the linear encoder connected to ch. B.
Refer to the alarm detail list of the "Linear Encoder Instruction Manual".
Remove its cause described in the instruction manual.
Contact each encoder manufacturer for how to deal with it.
76.2 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-2
Check it with the check method for [AL. 76.1].
76.3 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-3
76.4 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-4
76.5 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-5
76.6 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-6
76.7 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-7
76.8 Encoder I/F module - Ch. B Linear encoder error 1-8
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 27
Alarm No.: 8E Name: Serial communication error
Alarm content A communication error occurred between the head module and controller. An error occurred in the serial communication (Mitsubishi Electric general-purpose AC servo protocol).
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
8E.4 Serial communication command error
(1) The transmitted command is out of specifications.
Check the command at the time of transmission.
The transmitted command is out of specifications.
Correct the transmission data.
[MT2010]
The transmitted command is within specifications.
Check (2).
(2) The communication protocol is failure.
Check if transmission data conforms to the communication protocol.
It is not conforming. Modify the transmission data according to the communication protocol.
8E.5 Serial communication data number error
(1) The transmitted data number is out of specifications.
Check the data number at the time of transmission.
The transmitted data number is out of specifications.
Correct the transmission data.
The transmitted data number is within specifications.
Check (2).
(2) The communication protocol is failure.
Check if transmission data conforms to the communication protocol.
It is not conforming. Modify the transmission data according to the communication protocol.
Alarm No.: (Note) Name: Watchdog
Alarm content A part such as CPU is malfunctioning.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
(Note) Watchdog (1) A part in the sensing module failed.
Replace the module, and then check the repeatability.
It is not repeatable. Replace the unit. [MT2010] [MT2100] [MT2200] [MT2300] [MT2400]
Note. The alarm No. will not be shown. Check the status display LED of each sensing module.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 28
10.5 Remedies for warnings
An operation will be stopped with [AL. E7]. If any other warning occurs, the operation can be continued, but an alarm may occur, causing improper operation. A warning No. will not be shown on the module LED. Check the warning No. of the sensing module by starting MELSOFT MR Configurator2 via MELSOFT MT Works2. Remove the cause of warning according to this section. Use MR Configurator2 to refer to the cause of warning occurrence. Alarm No.: E4 Name: Parameter warning
Alarm content Out of the setting range was attempted to write during parameter writing.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
E4.1 Parameter setting range error warning
(1) A parameter was set to out of range with the servo system controller.
Check the parameter setting value set with the servo system controller.
It is out of setting range.
Set it within the range.
[MT2010] [MT2100] [MT2200] [MT2300] [MT2400]
Alarm No.: E7 Name: Controller forced stop warning
Alarm content The forced stop signal of the controller or servo system controller was enabled.
Detail No.
Detail name Cause Check method Check result Action Target
E7.1 Controller forced stop input warning
(1) The forced stop signal of the servo system controller was inputted.
Check if the servo system controller is a forced stop status.
It is the forced stop status.
Ensure safety and cancel the forced stop signal of the controller.
[MT2010]
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 29
10.6 Trouble which does not trigger an alarm/warning
POINT
When the sensing module malfunctions, the following status may occur.
The following shows some examples of possible causes which do not trigger an alarm or warning. Remove each cause by referring to this section. 10.6.1 MR-MT2010 SSCNET III/H head module
LED display status Possible cause Check result Action
RUN ERR
Off Off The external I/O terminal is shorted.
When the error is solved by the extension module removed, check if the extension module is malfunctioning.
Replace the extension module.
Check if the power supply cable to CN2 of the head module is not shorted.
Review the wiring of the power supply cable.
Power has not been input. Check if the power is turned off.
Turn on the power.
The voltage in the power supply has dropped.
Check if the power supply voltage dropped.
Increase the power supply voltage.
Off On in red The head module is malfunctioning.
Replace the head module, and then check the repeatability.
Replace the head module.
On in green On in red The head module is malfunctioning.
Replace the head module, and then check the repeatability.
Replace the head module.
An error occurred in SSCNET III/H communication.
Check it with the check method for [AL. 34.1].
10.6.2 MR-MT2100 I/O module
LED display status Possible cause Check result Action
RUN ERR
On in red On in red Modules are connected incorrectly.
Check if connections between modules are correct.
Connect the modules correctly.
The I/O module is malfunctioning.
Replace the I/O module, and then check the repeatability.
Replace the I/O module.
The head module is malfunctioning.
Replace the head module, and then check the repeatability.
Replace the head module.
Remains on in orange.
Remains on in orange.
The number of extension modules connected to the head module exceeded the maximum number.
Check if five or more extension modules have been connected to one head module.
Connect four or less extension modules to one head module.
The I/O module is malfunctioning.
Replace the I/O module, and then check the repeatability.
Replace the I/O module.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 30
10.6.3 MR-MT2200 pulse I/O module
LED display status Possible cause Check result Action
AX.A AX.B
On in red On in red An alarm has occurred in A- axis or B-axis.
Check if an alarm has occurred.
Take actions following the remedies for the alarm.
Modules are connected incorrectly.
Check if connections between modules are correct.
Connect the modules correctly.
The pulse I/O module is malfunctioning.
Replace the pulse I/O module, and then check the repeatability.
Replace the pulse I/O module.
The head module is malfunctioning.
Replace the head module, and then check the repeatability.
Replace the head module.
Remains on in orange.
Remains on in orange.
The number of extension modules connected to the head module exceeded the maximum number.
Check if five or more extension modules have been connected to one head module.
Connect four or less extension modules to one head module.
The pulse I/O module is malfunctioning.
Replace the pulse I/O module, and then check the repeatability.
Replace the pulse I/O module.
10.6.4 MR-MT2300 analog I/O module
LED display status Possible cause Check result Action
RUN ERR
On in red On in red Modules are connected incorrectly.
Check if connections between modules are correct.
Connect the modules correctly.
The analog I/O module is malfunctioning.
Replace the analog I/O module, and then check the repeatability.
Replace the analog I/O module.
The head module is malfunctioning.
Replace the head module, and then check the repeatability.
Replace the head module.
Remains on in orange.
Remains on in orange.
The number of extension modules connected to the head module exceeded the maximum number.
Check if five or more extension modules have been connected to one head module.
Connect four or less extension modules to one head module.
The analog I/O module is malfunctioning.
Replace the analog I/O module, and then check the repeatability.
Replace the analog I/O module.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 31
10.6.5 MR-MT2400 encoder I/F module
LED display status Possible cause Check result Action
CH.A CH.B
On in red On in red An alarm has occurred in A- axis or B-axis.
Check if an alarm has occurred.
Take actions following the remedies for the alarm.
Modules are connected incorrectly.
Check if connections between modules are correct.
Connect the modules correctly.
The head module is malfunctioning.
Replace the head module, and then check the repeatability.
Replace the head module.
The encoder I/F module is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder I/F module, and then check the repeatability.
Replace the encoder I/F module.
Remains on in orange.
Remains on in orange.
The number of extension modules connected to the head module exceeded the maximum number.
Check if five or more extension modules have been connected to one head module.
Connect four or less extension modules to one head module.
The encoder I/F module is malfunctioning.
Replace the encoder I/F module, and then check the repeatability.
Replace the encoder I/F module.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 32
MEMO
11. DIMENSIONS
11 - 1
11. DIMENSIONS
(1) MR-MT2010
[Unit: mm]
95
2
5 13
4
12 0
14 4
14.55
29.1 2-5
Mounting screw Screw size: M4 Tightening torque: 1.24 [Nm]
2 screws for fixing connector
Tightening torque: 0.1 [Nm] to 0.2 [Nm]
Mass: 0.2 [kg]
(2) MR-MT2100
[Unit: mm]
95
5 13
4
12 0
14 4
14.55
29.1 2-5
Mounting screw Screw size: M4 Tightening torque: 1.24 [Nm]
4 screws for fixing connectors
Tightening torque: 0.1 [Nm] to 0.2 [Nm]
Mass: 0.2 [kg]
11. DIMENSIONS
11 - 2
(3) MR-MT2200
[Unit: mm]
95
5 13
4
12 0
14 4
14.55
29.1 2-5
Mounting screw Screw size: M4 Tightening torque: 1.24 [Nm]
4 screws for fixing connectors
Tightening torque: 0.1 [Nm] to 0.2 [Nm]
Mass: 0.2 [kg]
(4) MR-MT2300
[Unit: mm]
95
5 1
3 4
1 2
0
1 4
4
14.55
29.1 2-5
Mounting screw Screw size: M4 Tightening torque: 1.24 [Nm]
6 screws for fixing connectors
Tightening torque: 0.1 [Nm] to 0.2 [Nm]
Mass: 0.2 [kg]
11. DIMENSIONS
11 - 3
(5) MR-MT2400
[Unit: mm]
95
5 1
3 4
1 2
0
1 4
4
14.55
29.1 2-5
Mounting screw Screw size: M4 Tightening torque: 1.24 [Nm]
4 screws for fixing connectors
Tightening torque: 0.1 [Nm] to 0.2 [Nm]
Mass: 0.2 [kg]
11. DIMENSIONS
11 - 4
MEMO
APPENDIX
App. - 1
APPENDIX
App. 1 Compliance with global standards
App. 1.1 About safety
This chapter explains safety of users and machine operators. Please read the chapter carefully before mounting the equipment. App. 1.1.1 Professional engineer
Only professional engineers should mount sensing modules. Here, professional engineers should meet all the conditions below. (1) Persons who took a proper training of related work of electrical equipment or persons who can avoid risk
based on past experience. (2) Persons who have read and familiarized himself/herself with this installation guide. App. 1.1.2 Applications of the devices
Sensing modules comply with the following standards.
IEC/EN 61800-3, IEC/EN 60204-1 App. 1.1.3 Correct use
Use the sensing modules within specifications. Refer to section 1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2, 7.2 and 8.2 for specifications such as voltage, temperature, etc. Mitsubishi Electric Co. accepts no claims for liability if the equipment is used in any other way or if modifications are made to the device, even in the context of mounting and installation.
WARNING If you need to get close to the moving parts of the machine for inspection or others, ensure safety by confirming the power off, etc. Otherwise, it may cause an accident.
(1) Peripheral device
The followings are selected based on UL 508C, and CSA C22.2 No. 14.
(a) Power supply Sensing modules can be used under the conditions of the overvoltage category II. For the interface power supply, use an external 24 V DC power supply with reinforced insulation on I/O terminals.
APPENDIX
App. - 2
(2) EU compliance
The sensing modules are designed to comply with the following directions to meet requirements for mounting, using, and periodic technical inspections: EMC directive (2014/30/EU).
(a) EMC requirement
Sensing modules comply with category C3 in accordance with EN 61800-3. As for I/O wires (max. length 10 m.) and encoder cables (max. length 30 m), use shielded wires and ground the shields. Sensing modules are not intended to be used on a low-voltage public network which supplies domestic premises; radio frequency interference is expected if used on such a network. The installer shall provide a guide for Installation and use, including recommended mitigation devices. To avoid the risk of crosstalk to signal cables, the installation instructions shall either recommend that the power interface cable be segregated from signal cables. Use the DC power supply installed with the sensing module in the same cabinet. Do not connect the other electric devices to the DC power supply.
(b) For Declaration of Conformity (DoC)
Hereby, MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V., declares that the sensing modules are in compliance with the necessary requirements and standards (2014/30/EU). For the copy of Declaration of Conformity, contact your local sales office.
(3) USA/Canada compliance
This sensing module is designed in compliance with UL 508C and CSA C22.2 No. 14.
(a) Installation The minimum cabinet size is 150% of volume of each sensing module. Also, design the cabinet so that the ambient temperature in the cabinet is 60 C or less. The sensing module must be installed in the metal cabinet. Additionally, mount the sensing module on a cabinet that the protective earth based on the standard of IEC/EN 60204-1 is correctly connected. For environment, the units should be used in open type (UL 50) and overvoltage category shown in table in app. 1.7. The sensing module needs to be installed at or below of pollution degree 2. For connection, use copper wires.
(b) Short-circuit current rating (SCCR)
SCCR of sensing modules requires support at the branch circuit protection devices (fuse and circuit breaker, etc). Selection of the branch circuit protection devices is dependent on the external power supply.
(c) Branch circuit protection
For installation in United States, branch circuit protection must be provided, in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes. For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided, in accordance with the Canada Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes.
APPENDIX
App. - 3
(4) South Korea compliance
This product complies with the Radio Wave Law (KC mark). Please note the following to use the product. (A) ,
.
(The product is for business use (Class A) and meets the electromagnetic compatibility requirements. The seller and the user must note the above point, and use the product in a place except for home.)
App. 1.1.4 General cautions for safety protection and protective measures
Observe the following items to ensure proper use of the sensing modules. (1) For safety components and installing systems, only qualified personnel and professional engineers
should perform. (2) When mounting, installing, and using the sensing module, always observe standards and directives
applicable in the country. (3) The item about noises of the test notices in the manuals should be observed.
APPENDIX
App. - 4
App. 1.1.5 Residual risk
(1) Only qualified personnel are authorized to install, start-up, repair or service the machines in which these components are installed. Only trained engineers should install and operate the equipment. (ISO 13849- 1 Table F.1 No. 5)
(2) Protect the cables with appropriate ways (routing them in a cabinet, using a cable guard, etc.). (3) Keep the required clearance/creepage distance depending on voltage you use. App. 1.1.6 Disposal
Disposal of unusable or irreparable devices should always occur in accordance with the applicable country- specific waste disposal regulations. (Example: European Waste 16 02 14) App. 1.2 Installation direction and clearances
CAUTION
The devices must be installed in the specified direction. Not doing so may cause a malfunction.
Mount the sensing module on a cabinet which meets IP54 in the correct vertical direction to maintain pollution degree 2.
Top
Bottom
80 mm or more longer for wiring
10 mm or more
40 mm or more
40 mm or more
Cabinet Cabinet
10 mm or more
APPENDIX
App. - 5
App. 1.3 Configuration diagram
CAUTION Securely connect the cables in the specified method. Otherwise, the servo motor may operate unexpectedly.
The following shows configuration examples of sensing modules. Sensing modules are connected to the servo system controller by SSCNET III/H communication. Sensing modules can be connected to the same network system with the SSCNET III/H interface servo amplifier.
Servo system controller
Servo amplifiers Sensing modules
APPENDIX
App. - 6
App. 1.4 Signals
The following shows MR-MT2010 signals as a typical example. App. 1.4.1 Signal
24 12
23 11
22 10
21 9
20 8
19 7
18 6
17 5
16 4
15 3
14 2
13 1
Pin No. Symbol Symbol Pin No.
13 DI1 DI2 1
14 DI3 DI4 2
15 DI5 DI6 3
16 DI7 DI8 4
17 DI9 DI10 5
18 DI11 DI12 6
19 DICOM DICOM 7
20 DO1 DO2 8
21 DOCOM(-) DOCOM(-) 9
22 CTL(+) DOCOM(-) 10
23 24 V(+) 24G 11
24 FG FG 12
APPENDIX
App. - 7
App. 1.4.2 I/O device
Symbol Device Connector Pin No.
DI1 to DI12 Digital input
CN2
1 to 6/13 to 18
DO1/DO2 Digital output 8/20
DICOM Common terminal for input signals 7/19
DOCOM(-) Common terminal for output signals 9/10/21
24 V(+)/24G Control circuit power supply 11/23
FG Grounding 12/24
App. 1.5 Maintenance and service
WARNING To avoid an electric shock, only qualified personnel should attempt inspections. For repair and parts replacement, contact your local sales office.
App. 1.5.1 Inspection items
It is recommended that the following points periodically be checked. (1) Check the cables and the like for scratches or cracks. Perform periodic inspection according to
operating conditions. (2) Check that the wires are not coming out from the connector. (3) Check for dust accumulation on the sensing module. (4) Check for unusual noise generated from the sensing module.
APPENDIX
App. - 8
App. 1.6 Transportation and storage
CAUTION
Transport the products correctly according to their mass.
Stacking in excess of the limited number of product packages is not allowed.
Install the product in a load-bearing place of sensing module in accordance with the instruction manual.
Do not put excessive load on the machine.
When you keep or use it, please fulfill the following environment.
Item Environment
Ambient temperature
Operation [C] 0 to 60 Class 3K3 (IEC/EN 60721-3-3)
Transportation (Note) [C] -20 to 65 Class 2K4 (IEC/EN 60721-3-2)
Storage (Note) [C] -20 to 65 Class 1K4 (IEC/EN 60721-3-1)
Ambient humidity Operation, transportation, storage
5 %RH to 90 %RH
Vibration resistance
Test condition 10 Hz to 57 Hz with constant amplitude of 0.075 mm
57 Hz to 150 Hz with constant acceleration of 9.8 m/s2 to IEC/ EN 61800-5-1 (Test Fc of IEC 60068-2-6)
Operation 5.9 m/s2
Transportation (Note) Class 2M3 (IEC/EN 60721-3-2)
Storage Class 1M2 (IEC/EN 60721-3-2)
Pollution degree 2
IP rating IP20 (IEC/EN 60529)
Open type (UL 50)
Altitude Operation, storage Max. 2000 m above sea level
Transportation Max. 10000 m above sea level Note. In regular transport packaging
APPENDIX
App. - 9
App. 1.7 Technical data
App. 1.7.1 MR-MT2010
Item Specifications
Control circuit power supply input
Voltage 24 V DC
Permissible voltage fluctuation
24 V DC 10%
Rated current [A] 1.0
DI Points 12
Input type Photocoupler insulation, 24 V sink/source input
DO Points 2
Output method Photocoupler insulation, 24 V sink output
Mass [kg] 0.2
App. 1.7.2 MR-MT2100
Item Specifications
DI Points 16
Input type Photocoupler insulation, 24 V sink/source input
DO Points 16
Output method Photocoupler insulation, 24 V sink/source output (Note)
Mass [kg] 0.2
Note. The source output is usable when MR-MT2010 with software version A1 or later is connected.
App. 1.7.3 MR-MT2200
Item Specifications
Number of pulse I/O channels Output: 2/Input: 2/Input and output: 1 each (selective)
Pulse output Output signal Differential output/open collector output
Output pulse train Forward/reverse rotation pulse train, Signed pulse train,
A-phase/B-phase pulse train
Pulse input Input signal Differential input
Input pulse train Forward/reverse rotation pulse train, Signed pulse train,
A-phase/B-phase pulse train
DI Points 14 (7 each axis)
Input type Photocoupler insulation, 24 V sink/source input
DO Points 6 (3 each axis)
Output method Photocoupler insulation, 24 V sink/source output
Mass [kg] 0.2
App. 1.7.4 MR-MT2300
Item Specifications
Analog input Points 4
Input voltage range DC -10 V to +10 V/DC -5 V to +5 V (selective)
Analog output Points 4
Output voltage range DC -10 V to +10 V
Mass [kg] 0.2
App. 1.7.5 MR-MT2400
Item Specifications
Encoder communication format SSI
Mass [kg] 0.2
APPENDIX
App. - 10
App. 1.7.6 Dimensions/mounting hole process drawing
(1) MR-MT2010
[Unit: mm]
95
2
5 13
4
12 0
14 4
14.55
29.1
2-5
Mounting screw Screw size: M4 Tightening torque:
1.24 [Nm]
(2) MR-MT2100
[Unit: mm]
95
5 13
4
12 0
14 4
14.55
29.1
2-5
Mounting screw Screw size: M4 Tightening torque:
1.24 [Nm]
APPENDIX
App. - 11
(3) MR-MT2200
[Unit: mm]
95
5 13
4
12 0
14 4
14.55
29.1
2-5
Mounting screw Screw size: M4 Tightening torque:
1.24 [Nm]
(4) MR-MT2300
[Unit: mm]
95
5 13
4
12 0
14 4
14.55
29.1
2-5
Mounting screw Screw size: M4 Tightening torque:
1.24 [Nm]
APPENDIX
App. - 12
(5) MR-MT2400
[Unit: mm]
95
5 13
4
12 0
14 4
14.55
29.1
2-5
Mounting screw Screw size: M4 Tightening torque:
1.24 [Nm]
REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover. Revision Date *Manual Number Revision
Oct. 2016 SH(NA)030251ENG-A First edition
Feb. 2017 SH(NA)030251ENG-B MR-MT2100 Compatibility to source output is added
Section 3.1 Partially changed.
Section 4.5 Partially changed.
Section 4.7.3 Partially changed.
Section 5.2 Partially added and partially changed.
Section 5.6.1 Partially added.
Section 5.6.2 Partially added and partially changed.
Section 5.6.3 Newly added.
Section 5.6.4 Partially added and partially changed.
Section 6.2 Partially added.
Section 6.5.2 Partially changed.
Section 9.1.1 (2) Partially added.
Section 9.1.2 (2) Partially added.
Section 9.2.1 (2) Partially added.
Section 9.2.2 (1) Partially added.
Section 9.2.2 (2) Partially added.
Section 10.4 Partially added.
App.1.1.3 Added "Warning".
App.1.3 Added "Caution".
App.1.7.2 Partially changed.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
2016 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
MEMO
MELSERVO is a trademark or registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and/or other countries. All other product names and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Country/Region Sales office Tel/Fax USA Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc.
500 Corporate Woods Parkway, Vernon Hills, IL 60061, U.S.A.
Tel Fax
: +1-847-478-2100 : +1-847-478-2253
Mexico Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc. Mexico Branch Mariano Escobedo #69, Col. Zona Industrial, Tlalnepantla Edo. Mexico, C.P.54030
Tel Fax
: +52-55-3067-7500 :
Brazil Mitsubishi Electric do Brasil Comercio e Servicos Ltda. Avenida Adelino Cardana, 293, 21 andar, Bethaville, CEP 06401-147, Barueri SP, Brazil
Tel Fax
: +55-11-4689-3000 : +55-11-4689-3016
Germany Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. German Branch Mitsubishi-Electric-Platz 1, 40882 Ratingen, Germany
Tel Fax
: +49-2102-486-0 : +49-2102-486-1120
UK Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. UK Branch Travellers Lane, UK-Hatfield, Hertfordshire, AL10 8XB, U.K.
Tel Fax
: +44-1707-28-8780 : +44-1707-27-8695
Italy Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Italian Branch Centro Direzionale Colleoni - Palazzo Sirio, Viale Colleoni 7, 20864 Agrate Brianza (MB), Italy
Tel Fax
: +39-039-60531 : +39-039-6053-312
Spain Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Spanish Branch Carretera de Rubi, 76-80-Apdo. 420, 08190 Sant Cugat del Valles (Barcelona), Spain
Tel Fax
: +34-935-65-3131 : +34-935-89-1579
France Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. French Branch 25, Boulevard des Bouvets, 92741 Nanterre Cedex, France
Tel Fax
: +33-1-55-68-55-68 : +33-1-55-68-57-57
Czech Republic Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Czech Branch Avenir Business Park, Radlicka 751/113e, 158 00 Praha 5, Czech Republic
Tel Fax
: +420-251-551-470 : +420-251-551-471
Poland Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Polish Branch ul. Krakowska 50, 32-083 Balice, Poland
Tel Fax
: +48-12-347-65-00 : +48-12-630-47-01
Russia Mitsubishi Electric (Russia) LLC St. Petersburg Branch Piskarevsky pr. 2, bld 2, lit Sch, BC Benua, office 720; 195027 St. Petersburg, Russia
Tel Fax
: +7-812-633-3497 : +7-812-633-3499
Sweden Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. (Scandinavia) Fjelievagen 8, SE-22736 Lund, Sweden
Tel Fax
: +46-8-625-10-00 : +46-46-39-70-18
Turkey Mitsubishi Electric Turkey A.S. Umraniye Branch Serifali Mahallesi Nutuk Sokak No:5, TR-34775 Umraniye / Istanbul, Turkey
Tel Fax
: +90-216-526-3990 : +90-216-526-3995
UAE Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Dubai Branch Dubai Silicon Oasis, P.O.BOX 341241, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel Fax
: +971-4-3724716 : +971-4-3724721
South Africa Adroit Technologies 20 Waterford Office Park, 189 Witkoppen Road, Fourways, South Africa
Tel Fax
: +27-11-658-8100 : +27-11-658-8101
China Mitsubishi Electric Automation (China) Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Automation Center, No.1386 Hongqiao Road, Shanghai, China
Tel Fax
: +86-21-2322-3030 : +86-21-2322-3000
Taiwan SETSUYO ENTERPRISE CO., LTD. 6F, No.105, Wugong 3rd Road, Wugu District, New Taipei City 24889, Taiwan
Tel Fax
: +886-2-2299-2499 : +886-2-2299-2509
Korea Mitsubishi Electric Automation Korea Co., Ltd. 7F-9F, Gangseo Hangang Xi-tower A, 401, Yangcheon-ro, Gangseo-Gu, Seoul 07528, Korea
Tel Fax
: +82-2-3660-9510 : +82-2-3664-8372/8335
Singapore Mitsubishi Electric Asia Pte. Ltd. 307 Alexandra Road, Mitsubishi Electric Building, Singapore 159943
Tel Fax
: +65-6473-2308 : +65-6476-7439
Thailand Mitsubishi Electric Factory Automation (Thailand) Co., Ltd. 12th Floor, SV.City Building, Office Tower 1, No. 896/19 and 20 Rama 3 Road, Kwaeng Bangpongpang, Khet Yannawa, Bangkok 10120, Thailand
Tel Fax
: +66-2682-6522 to 6531 : +66-2682-6020
Indonesia PT. Mitsubishi Electric Indonesia Gedung Jaya 11th Floor, JL. MH. Thamrin No.12, Jakarta Pusat 10340, Indonesia
Tel Fax
: +62-21-3192-6461 : +62-21-3192-3942
Vietnam Mitsubishi Electric Vietnam Company Limited Unit 01-04, 10th Floor, Vincom Center, 72 Le Thanh Ton Street, District 1, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam
Tel Fax
: +84-8-3910-5945 : +84-8-3910-5947
India Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd. Pune Branch Emerald House, EL-3, J Block, M.I.D.C., Bhosari, Pune - 411026, Maharashtra, India
Tel Fax
: +91-20-2710-2000 : +91-20-2710-2100
Australia Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty. Ltd. 348 Victoria Road, P.O. Box 11, Rydalmere, N.S.W 2116, Australia
Tel Fax
: +61-2-9684-7777 : +61-2-9684-7245
Japan Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Tokyo Building, 2-7-3, Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-8310, Japan
Tel : +81-3-3218-2111
Warranty
1. Warranty period and coverage We will repair any failure or defect hereinafter referred to as "failure" in our FA equipment hereinafter referred to as the "Product" arisen during warranty period at no charge due to causes for which we are responsible through the distributor from which you purchased the Product or our service provider. However, we will charge the actual cost of dispatching our engineer for an on-site repair work on request by customer in Japan or overseas countries. We are not responsible for any on-site readjustment and/or trial run that may be required after a defective unit are repaired or replaced.
[Term]
The term of warranty for Product is twelve (12) months after your purchase or delivery of the Product to a place designated by you or eighteen (18) months from the date of manufacture whichever comes first (Warranty Period). Warranty period for repaired Product cannot exceed beyond the original warranty period before any repair work.
[Limitations]
(1) You are requested to conduct an initial failure diagnosis by yourself, as a general rule. It can also be carried out by us or our service company upon your request and the actual cost will be charged. However, it will not be charged if we are responsible for the cause of the failure.
(2) This limited warranty applies only when the condition, method, environment, etc. of use are in compliance with the terms and
conditions and instructions that are set forth in the instruction manual and user manual for the Product and the caution label affixed to the Product.
(3) Even during the term of warranty, the repair cost will be charged on you in the following cases;
(i) a failure caused by your improper storing or handling, carelessness or negligence, etc., and a failure caused by your
hardware or software problem
(ii) a failure caused by any alteration, etc. to the Product made on your side without our approval
(iii) a failure which may be regarded as avoidable, if your equipment in which the Product is incorporated is equipped with a
safety device required by applicable laws and has any function or structure considered to be indispensable according to a common sense in the industry
(iv) a failure which may be regarded as avoidable if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual, etc. are duly
maintained and replaced
(v) any replacement of consumable parts (battery, fan, smoothing capacitor, etc.)
(vi) a failure caused by external factors such as inevitable accidents, including without limitation fire and abnormal fluctuation of
voltage, and acts of God, including without limitation earthquake, lightning and natural disasters
(vii) a failure generated by an unforeseeable cause with a scientific technology that was not available at the time of the shipment
of the Product from our company
(viii) any other failures which we are not responsible for or which you acknowledge we are not responsible for
2. Term of warranty after the stop of production (1) We may accept the repair at charge for another seven (7) years after the production of the product is discontinued. The
announcement of the stop of production for each model can be seen in our Sales and Service, etc.
(2) Please note that the Product (including its spare parts) cannot be ordered after its stop of production.
3. Service in overseas countries Our regional FA Center in overseas countries will accept the repair work of the Product. However, the terms and conditions of the repair work may differ depending on each FA Center. Please ask your local FA center for details.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to:
(1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi.
(2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products.
(3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products.
(4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Change of Product specifications
Specifications listed in our catalogs, manuals or technical documents may be changed without notice.
6. Application and use of the Product (1) For the use of our General-Purpose AC Servo, its applications should be those that may not result in a serious damage even if any
failure or malfunction occurs in General-Purpose AC Servo, and a backup or fail-safe function should operate on an external system to General-Purpose AC Servo when any failure or malfunction occurs.
(2) Our General-Purpose AC Servo is designed and manufactured as a general purpose product for use at general industries.
Therefore, applications substantially influential on the public interest for such as atomic power plants and other power plants of electric power companies, and also which require a special quality assurance system, including applications for railway companies and government or public offices are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these applications when used. In addition, applications which may be substantially influential to human lives or properties for such as airlines, medical treatments, railway service, incineration and fuel systems, man-operated material handling equipment, entertainment machines, safety machines, etc. are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these applications when used. We will review the acceptability of the abovementioned applications, if you agree not to require a specific quality for a specific application. Please contact us for consultation.
SH(NA)030251ENG-B
SH(NA)030251ENG-B(1702)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications are subject to change without notice. This Instruction Manual uses recycled paper.
MODEL
MODEL CODE
General-Purpose AC Servo
M R
-M T
2000 S E
R IE
S IN
S T
Related manuals for Mitsubishi Electric MRMT2010, MRMT2100, MRMT2200, MRMT2300 Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the MRMT2010 Mitsubishi Electric works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi Electric MRMT2010, MRMT2100, MRMT2200, MRMT2300 Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Instruction Manual for Mitsubishi Electric MRMT2010 as well as other Mitsubishi Electric manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Instruction Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi Electric MRMT2010. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi Electric MRMT2010, MRMT2100, MRMT2200, MRMT2300 Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Mitsubishi Electric MRMT2010, MRMT2100, MRMT2200, MRMT2300 Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Mitsubishi Electric MRMT2010, MRMT2100, MRMT2200, MRMT2300 Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Mitsubishi Electric MRMT2010, MRMT2100, MRMT2200, MRMT2300 Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi Electric MRMT2010, MRMT2100, MRMT2200, MRMT2300 Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.